ADVANCED MANUAL

1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS
ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER

|905 2 SCOPE OPERATION (ADVANCED)

3 SD CARD (ADVANCED)

4 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

5 VOICE TX MEMORY FUNCTION

6 MEMORY OPERATION

7 SCANS

8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

This manual describes instructions for advanced features and 12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION
instructions.
See the BASIC MANUAL that come with the transceiver for
precautions and basic operations. 13 DD MODE OPERATION

14 MAINTENANCE (ADVANCED)

15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

16 ADVANCED CONNECTIONS
INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing this Icom product. This product is designed and built with Icom’s state of the art technology
and craftsmanship. With proper care, this product should provide you with years of trouble-free operation.

This product combines traditional analog technologies with Digital Smart Technologies for Amateur Radio
(D-STAR), for a balanced package.

ABOUT THE MANUALS

You can use the following manuals to understand and operate this transceiver. (As of March 2023)
TIP: You can download each manual and guide from the Icom website.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/
Enter “IC-905” into the Search box in the site.

•• Basic manual (Comes with the transceiver)

Instructions for basic operations.

•• Connection guide (Leaflet, Comes with the transceiver)

Instructions for connecting the controller and RF unit.

•• Advanced manual (This manual)

Instructions for advanced operations in English.

•• CI-V Reference guide (PDF type)

Describes the control commands used in remote control operation (serial communication with CI-V) in English.

•• About the Share Pictures function (PDF type)

Describes how to use the Share Pictures function in English.

For Reference
•• HAM Radio Terms (PDF type)
A glossary of HAM radio terms in English.

To read the manuals or Guide, Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® is required. If you have not installed it, please download
the Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® and install it to your PC. You can download it from Adobe Systems Incorporated’s
website.

TRADEMARKS
Icom and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the United
Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia, Australia, New Zealand, and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
APRS® is a registered trademark of Mr. Bob Bruninga in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.
Google, the Google Logo, Google Play, the Google Play logo, Android, and the Android logo are trademarks of Google, LLC.
All other products or brands are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders.
i
INTRODUCTION

FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES OF ADOBE® ACROBAT® READER®

The following functions and features can be used with Adobe Acrobat Reader.

•• Keyword search •• Find screen

Click “Find” (Ctrl+F) or “Advanced
Search” (Shift+Ctrl+F) in the Edit
menu to open the search screen.
This is convenient when searching
for a particular word or phrase in this
manual.
•• Advanced search screen
LLThe menu screen may differ,
depending on the Adobe Acrobat
Reader version.

Click to open the find or

search screen or advanced
search screen.

•• Printing out the desired pages. •• Read Out Loud feature.

Click “Print” in File menu, and then select the paper The Read Out Loud feature reads aloud the text in
size and page numbers you want to print. this PDF.
LLThe printing setup may differ, depending on the printer. Refer to the Adobe Acrobat Reader Help for the
Refer to your printer’s instruction manual for details. details.
LLSelect the “A4” size to print out the page in the original (This feature may not be usable, depending on your
manual size. PC environment, including the operating system.)

LLThe screen may differ, depending on the Adobe Acrobat Reader version.
ii
INTRODUCTION

KEYBOARD ENTERING AND EDITING

Keyboard types:
You can select the Full Keyboard or Tenkey pad in
“Keyboard Type” on the FUNCTION screen.
» SET > Function > Keyboard Type

LLYou can also temporarily switch in the QUICK MENU

screen by pushing .

LLYou can select the full keyboard layout in “Full Keyboard

Layout” on the FUNCTION screen.
» SET > Function > Full Keyboard Layout

Entering and editing:

Moves the cursor backward Moves the cursor forward

Clears the entered character

Selects the character type

Enters an uppercase letter Saves the entry

Selects alphabet mode or Cancels the entry and returns

numeric mode to the previous screen

Enters a space

Alphabet mode
Numeric mode
Symbol mode

iii
INTRODUCTION

USABLE CHARACTERS
You can enter and edit the items in the following table.
Maximum
Menu Category Item Selectable characters
characters
SET My Station My Call Sign A to Z, 0 to 9, (space), / 8+4
TX Message [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 20
Network Set Network Name A to Z, 0 to 9, ! " # $ % & ( ) + , - . ; = @ [ ] ^ 15
Network User 1/2 ID [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 16
Network User 1/2 Password •• Illegal characters: \ (space) 16*1
Network Radio Name 16
Time Set NTP Server Address A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, - . 64
SD Card Save Setting [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 23
Export •• Illegal characters: / : ; * < > \ |

MEMORY GROUP NAME, [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 16

MEMORY NAME
SCAN Program Scan Edge NAME [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 16
KEYER Keyer Memory A to Z, 0 to 9, (space), / ? ^ . , @ 70
•• “ *” (asterisk) has its own unique use.
DECODE RTTY Memory A to Z, 0 to 9, (space), ! $ & ? “ ‘ - / . , : ; ( ) ↵ 70
VOICE VOICE TX RECORD [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 16
CS UR, R1, R2 A to Z, 0 to 9, (space), / 8
DV/DD Your Call Sign NAME [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 16
MEMORY CALL SIGN A to Z, 0 to 9, (space), / 8
Repeater List GROUP NAME, NAME [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 16
SUB NAME [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 8
CALL SIGN, GW CALL SIGN A to Z, 0 to 9, (space), / 8
DV GW Internal Gateway Gateway Repeater A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, - . 64
Settings (Server IP/Domain)
Terminal/AP Call sign, A to Z, 0 to 9, (space) 8
Allowed Call Sign List
GPS GPS TX Mode Unproto Address [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 56*2
Object Name, Item Name [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 9
Comment [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 43*3
GPS Message [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 20
GPS Memory GROUP NAME, NAME [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 16
DTMF DTMF MEMORY 0 to 9, A B C D * # 24
SEND Direct Input 0 to 9, A B C D * # 24
PRESET Preset Name [AB] [ab] [12] [!″#] 16
DR TO SELECT Direct input (UR)/(RPT) A to Z, 0 to 9, (space), / 8

[AB]: A to Z, (space) *1 Minimum of 8 characters

[ab]: a to z, (space) *2 Normally 12 characters
[12]: 0 to 9, (space) *3 The maximum number of characters you can enter
[!"#]: ! " # $ % & ′ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜ depends on the data extension and altitude settings.
(space)

iv
Section 1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS
VOX function������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-2
DD Adjusting the VOX function�������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-2
∂TX function�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-3
DD ∂TX monitor function�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-3
Operating CW (ADVANCED)������������������������������������������������������������������������1-3
DD About the CW Reverse mode����������������������������������������������������������������������������1-3
DD Using the Memory Keyer function (KEYER)������������������������������������������������������1-4
DD Keyer memory edit menu (EDIT)�����������������������������������������������������������������������1-5
DD Contest number menu (001 SET)���������������������������������������������������������������������1-6
DD Keyer Set menu (CW-KEY SET)�����������������������������������������������������������������������1-7
Operating RTTY (FSK)���������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-8
DD Displaying the RTTY DECODE screen�������������������������������������������������������������1-8
DD RTTY decoding��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-8
DD Twin Peak Filter (TPF)���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-8
DD Transmitting an RTTY memory content�������������������������������������������������������������1-9
DD Editing an RTTY memory��������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-10
DD Turning ON the RTTY log��������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-11
DD Viewing the RTTY log contents�����������������������������������������������������������������������1-11
DD RTTY DECODE LOG SET screen������������������������������������������������������������������1-12
DD RTTY DECODE SET screen���������������������������������������������������������������������������1-13
Operating ATV��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-14
DD VIDEO SET screen�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-15
Tone squelch operation������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-16
DTCS code squelch operation�������������������������������������������������������������������1-17
Repeater operation�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-18
DD Checking the repeater input signal������������������������������������������������������������������1-18
DD Setting the repeater tone frequency����������������������������������������������������������������1-19
DD 1750 Hz tone burst������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-19
Duplex operation����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-20
Data communication�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������1-20

1-1
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

VOX function
SSB, AM, FM, DV, and ATV modes VOX GAIN (Default: 50%)
The Voice-Operated Transmission (VOX) function Adjusts the transmit/receive switching threshold level
switches between transmit and receive with your to between 0% and 100% for VOX operation. Higher
voice. This function enables hands-free operation. values make the VOX function more sensitive to your
voice.
Push to turn the VOX function ON or OFF.

ANTI VOX (Default: 50%)

Adjusts the ANTI VOX level to between 0% and 100%
to prevent unwanted VOX activation from the speaker
or other sounds. Higher values make the VOX
The VOX function is ON. function less sensitive.

DELAY (Default: 0.2s)

Adjusts the DELAY to between 0 and 2.0 seconds.
DDAdjusting the VOX function
Set for a convenient interval for normal pauses in a
Before using the VOX function, adjust the following speech before returning to receive.
items.
•• VOX GAIN
•• ANTI VOX VOICE DELAY (Default: OFF)
•• DELAY Sets the VOICE DELAY to prevent cutting off your
•• VOICE DELAY voice when switching to transmit.
•• Select “SHORT,” “MID,” “LONG,” or OFF.
1. Hold down for 1 second.
2. Touch the item to adjust. (Example: ANTI VOX)

3. Rotate to adjust the item.

LLTouching VOICE DELAY selects “SHORT,” “MID,”
“LONG,” or “OFF.”
4. To close the VOX menu, push .

1-2
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

∂TX function Operating CW (ADVANCED)

The ∂TX function shifts your transmit frequency up to DDAbout the CW Reverse mode
±9.99 kHz without shifting the displayed frequency. The CW-R (CW Reverse) mode reverses the receive
Beat Frequency Oscillator (BFO) to receive CW
1. Push . signals.
Use this when interfering signals are near the desired
∂TX frequency
signal, and you want to use the CW-R to reduce
(3 digits)
interference.

CW mode (USB side) CW-R mode (LSB side)

•• The ∂TX function turns ON.
LLIf the RIT function turns ON, hold down for
1 second.
LLWhile using the Fine Tuning function (Basic manual),
the ∂TX frequency is displayed in 4 digits, instead of
3. BFO BFO
LLPushing again turns OFF the ∂TX function. Desired Interference Desired Interference
2. Rotate to set the ∂TX frequency to match signal signal
the received station’s frequency, up to ±9.99 kHz.

TIP: Reversing the carrier point

Set the ∂TX
The carrier point of the CW mode is USB by default.
frequency.
You can change it to LSB in the following menu.
» SET > Function > CW Normal Side
LLYou can reset the ∂TX frequency to “0.00” by holding LLWhen this setting is set to “LSB,” the CW and CW-R
down for 1 second. modes are reversed.
3. After communicating, push to turn OFF
the ∂TX function.

DD∂TX monitor function

When the ∂TX function is ON, you can directly
monitor the operating frequency by holding down .
LLWhile monitoring, the Noise Reduction, Notch filter, and
Twin PBT are temporarily turned OFF.

1-3
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating CW (ADVANCED)

DDUsing the Memory Keyer function (KEYER)

You can send preset characters using the Memory Count-up trigger
Keyer function. The Count-up trigger enables the serial number to be
automatically increased after each complete serial
Sending number exchange is sent. (Default: M2)
1. Display the KEYER screen.
» KEYER
Count-up trigger icon
LLThe [KEYER] key is displayed only in the CW mode.
2. Push to turn ON the Break-in function.
(Basic manual)
3. Touch a Memory Keyer key between [M1] and
[M8]. (Example: [M1])
Present number counter

Sending
memory LL is displayed on the Memory Keyer set to the Count-up
contents trigger.
LLYou can change the Count-up trigger setting in the
KEYER 001 menu. (p. 1-6)

•• The touched memory contents are sent.

4. To repeatedly send the memory contents, touch Preset Keyer memory contents
the Memory Keyer key for 1 second. Keyer
Contents
memory
Repeat icon
M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST
M2 UR 5NN 001 BK
M3 CFM TU
M4 QRZ?

LL“001” is the CW contest number. If you want to set

LLThe memory contents will be repeatedly sent, the Count-up trigger to a different keyer, delete the “*”
according to the setting in “Keyer Repeat Time.” (asterisk) from the Memory Keyer M2. (p. 1-5)
LLTo stop sending, touch the Memory Keyer key again.
When an external keypad is connected:
Key Action You can transmit the preset contents in the Keyer
Touch Sends the memory contents. memory (M1 ~ M8) from an external device by
setting the “External Keypad,” and then connecting
is displayed and repeatedly an external keypad to the [ELEC-KEY] jack on the
M1 ~ M8 Touch for sends the memory contents. IC-905.
1 second You can change the repeat interval » SET > Connectors > External Keypad
setting in “Keyer Repeat Time” in
the CW-KEY SET menu. (p. 1-7)
Reduces the contest number counter by 1
(001).
–1
•• You can change or reset the number in
001
“Present Number” in the KEYER 001 menu.
(p. 1-6)
EDIT/SET Displays the EDIT/SET screen.

1-4
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating CW (ADVANCED)

DDKeyer memory edit menu (EDIT)

You can edit the Keyer memory contents. 5. Enter “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST,” and then
LLYou can use up to a total of 8 Memory Keyers (M1 to M8), touch [ENT] to save.
and you can enter up to 70 characters in each memory.

Example: Entering “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST” to M3

1. Display the KEYER MEMORY screen in the CW
mode.
» KEYER > EDIT/SET > EDIT

2. Touch “CFM TU” for 1 second.

3. Touch “Edit.”
6. To close the KEYER MEMORY screen,
push .

Selectable characters
Alphabets ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Symbols /?^.,@*
Numbers 1234567890
4. Touch [CLR] on the Keyer Memory keyboard until
the preset contents are cleared.
About the symbols
•• Enter the “^” to send a string of characters with no
intercharacter space. Put “^” before a text string such as
^AR, and the string “ar” is sent with no space.
•• Enter the “*” (asterisk) to insert the CW contest number.
The number automatically advances by 1. You can use
this for only 1 Memory keyer at a time. The “*” is used in
Memory Keyer M2 by default.

1-5
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating CW (ADVANCED)

DDContest number menu (001 SET)

You can set the number style, Count-up trigger, and Number Style (Default: Normal)
preset number. Sets the numbering system used for contest (serial)
numbers— normal or short morse numbers.
1. Display the KEYER 001 screen in the CW mode. •• Select Normal, 190→ANO, 190→ANT, 90→NO, or
» KEYER > EDIT/SET > 001 SET 90→NT.
2. Touch the item to set. (Example: Number Style)
Count Up Trigger (Default: M2)
Selects which of the 8 memories will contain the
contest serial number exchange.
•• Select between M1 ~ M8.

Present Number (Default: 001)

Sets the current number for the Count-up trigger.
3. Touch the option to set. (Example: 190→ANO) •• Set to between 001 ~ 9999.

•• Returns to the KEYER 001 screen.

4. To close the KEYER 001 screen, push .

TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching

the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on
the QUICK MENU screen.

1-6
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating CW (ADVANCED)

DDKeyer Set menu (CW-KEY SET)

In this screen, you can set the memory keyer repeat Dot/Dash Ratio (Default: 1:1:3.0)
time, dash weight, paddle specifications, key type, Sets the dot/dash ratio.
and so on. •• Set to between 1:1:2.8 ~ 1:1:4.5 in 0.1 steps.

1. Display the CW-KEY SET screen in the CW Keying weight example: Morse code “K”
mode.
Dot Dash Dash
» KEYER > EDIT/SET > CW-KEY SET
1 1 3

2. Touch the item to set. (Example: Side Tone Level)

Default: 1:1:3
1 1 2�8～4�5

Setting range
1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5

Setting range Space

Rise Time (Default: 4ms)

3. Touch the option to set. (Example: 80%) Sets the rise time of the transmitted CW envelope.
•• Set to 2, 4, 6, or 8 milliseconds.

Key action TX
RX

TX output Set TX output power

power
0
Time
Rise time
4. To close the CW-KEY SET screen, push .
Paddle Polarity (Default: Normal)
TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching Sets the paddle dot-dash polarity to Normal or
the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on Reverse.
the QUICK MENU screen. •• Normal: Right = dash, Left = dot
•• Reverse: Right = dot, Left = dash

Key Type (Default: Paddle)

Sets the key type for the [ELEC-KEY] jack on the side
panel.
Side Tone Level (Default: 50%) •• Set to Straight, Bug, or Paddle.
Adjusts the CW side tone output level. LLWhen using an external Elec-keyer, select “Straight.”
•• Adjust to between 0 ~ 100%.
MIC Up/Down Keyer (Default: OFF)
Side Tone Level Limit (Default: ON) Selects whether or not to use the keys on the
Turns the CW side tone level limit ON or OFF. This microphone as a CW key.
function disables the CW side tone when you increase •• OFF: Do not use the microphone keys as a
AF GAIN above the side tone level. CW key.
•• ON (UP/DOWN):
Use the [▲]/[▼] keys as a CW key.
Keyer Repeat Time (Default: 2sec) •• ON (A/B): Use the [A]/[B] keys as a CW key.
Sets the time between Memory keyer transmissions. LLThe microphone keys do not work as a “squeeze key.”
•• Set to between 1 ~ 60 seconds. LLWhen “ON” is selected, you cannot use the function that
LLAfter transmitting a Memory keyer contents, the is assigned to each key.
transmission is repeated after the set time period.
LL is displayed, even between transmissions.

1-7
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating RTTY (FSK)

The IC-905 has a built-in RTTY decoder and encoder. DDRTTY decoding
Using contents set in the RTTY TX memory, you can Rotate to tune a signal.
do basic RTTY operations without using an external
device or software.

DDDisplaying the RTTY DECODE screen

With the built-in demodulator and decoder, received
RTTY characters are displayed on the RTTY LLInformation
DECODE screen. •• Aim for a symmetrical wave form, and be sure the peak
» DECODE points align with the mark (2125 Hz) and shift (170 Hz)
frequency lines in the FFT scope.
RTTY DECODE screen •• Tune to where both “◄” and “►” are displayed in the
FFT Scope zone tuning indicator.
Decoded or transmitting characters Tuning indicator •• The S-meter displays the signal strength, when a signal is
received.
•• If you are receiving an RTTY signal but cannot decode
correctly, try the RTTY-R (reverse) mode.

RTTY mode Normal RTTY-R mode

170 Hz 2125 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz

Waterfall zone

Space Mark BFO BFO Space Mark

(Displayed (Displayed
frequency) frequency)
Key Action
<1> TIP: If you cannot receive, change the following
Selects the Function menus.
<2> settings.
Turns the Hold function ON or OFF. » SET > Function > RTTY Mark Frequency
HOLD •• HOLD is displayed, and the RTTY » SET > Function > RTTY Shift Width
DECODE screen stops.
Clears the displayed characters.
•• While the Hold function is ON, this clears
CLR
the characters and cancels the Hold DDTwin Peak Filter (TPF)
function.
The Twin Peak Filter (TPF) changes the audio
Opens the RTTY MEMORY screen.
TX MEM frequency response by boosting the mark and space
•• Sending the RTTY MEMORY RT1 ~ RT8.
frequencies for better reception of RTTY signals, or for
Displays the RTTY DECODE LOG screen. decoding the AF output signal on a PC.
LOG •• You can start or stop logging, and select
the file type and the time stamp.
1. Push to open the Multi-function menu.
Displays the RTTY DECODE LOG VIEW 2. Touch [TPF].
LOG VIEW screen. LLTouching [TPF] turns the Twin Peak Filter function
•• You can check the saved RTTY log files. ON or OFF.
Opens the THRESHOLD screen. 3. To close the Multi-function menu, push .
ADJ
•• You can adjust the threshold level.
Selects the Expanded or Normal NOTE: When you are using the Twin Peak Filter, the
Touch
screen. received audio output may increase. This is not a
EXPD/SET
Touch for Displays the RTTY DECODE SET malfunction.
1 second screen.

1-8
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating RTTY (FSK)

DDTransmitting an RTTY memory content

You can transmit the preset characters on the RTTY Memory Preset characters by default
MEMORY screen.
RT1 ↵ DE ICOM ICOM K ↵
LLYou can edit the contents by touching [EDIT] on the RTTY
MEMORY screen. RT2 ↵ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K ↵
RT3 ↵ QSL UR 599–599 BK ↵
1. Display the RTTY DECODE screen in the RTTY RT4 ↵ QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599-599 BK ↵
mode.
RT5 ↵ 73 GL SK ↵
» DECODE
RT6 ↵ CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K ↵
2. Touch [TX MEM].
↵ MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–905 & ANTENNA
RT7
IS A PARABOLIC DISH. ↵
↵ MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS INTERNAL FSK
RT8
UNIT & DEMODULATOR OF THE IC–905. ↵

When an external keypad is connected:

You can transmit the preset contents in the RTTY
3. Touch an RTTY memory between [RT1] and [RT8] memory (RT1 ~ RT8) from an external device by
to transmit. (Example: RT1) setting the “External Keypad,” and then connecting
an external keypad to the [ELEC-KEY] jack on the
IC-905.
» SET > Connectors > External Keypad

Transmitting

Transmitting contents are displayed.

•• The TX status indicator lights red and the Po meter

swings.
LLTo cancel the transmission and to return to the RTTY
DECODE screen, push .
LLAfter transmitting, automatically returns to receive.

1-9
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating RTTY (FSK)

DDEditing an RTTY memory

You can edit the characters in the RTTY memories. 7. Enter new characters, and then touch [ENT] to
You can save and transmit 8 RTTY memories (RT1 save.
~ RT8) for often-used RTTY messages. Each RTTY
memory can contain up to 70 characters.

Example: Editing the content in RT2

1. Display the RTTY DECODE screen in the RTTY
mode.
» DECODE

2. Touch [TX MEM].

3. Touch [EDIT].

8. To close to the RTTY MEMORY screen, push

.

4. Touch the memory for 1 second.

5. Touch “Edit.”

6. To clear a character, touch [←] or [→] to move the

cursor, then touch [CLR].

1-10
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating RTTY (FSK)

DDTurning ON the RTTY log DDViewing the RTTY log contents

Turn ON the RTTY log to save your TX and RX RTTY You can view the saved RTTY log contents.
operating record onto an SD card.
LLYou can select the data format type in “Log Set” on the 1. Insert the SD card that the RTTY log is saved.
RTTY DECODE LOG screen. 2. Display the RTTY DECODE LOG VIEW screen in
LLThe log is saved even while “HOLD” is ON. the RTTY mode.
» DECODE > <1> > LOG VIEW
1. Display the RTTY DECODE LOG screen.
» DECODE > <1> > LOG 3. Touch the log file to view.

2. Touch “Decode Log.”

3. Touch “ON.”

•• The file with “�” in front of it is logging. You cannot

view this log’s contents.
4. To close the RTTY DECODE LOG screen, push
4. To close the RTTY DECODE LOG VIEW screen,
.
•• “�” is displayed on the RTTY DECODE screen while push several times.
the RTTY log is ON.
5. To turn OFF the RTTY log, touch “OFF” in step 3. Checking the file information and deleting a file
1. Touch the log file that you want to view or delete
TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching for 1 second.
the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on 2. Touch an item from “File Information,” “Delete,”
the QUICK MENU screen. and “Delete All.”

•• File Information: Displays the file name, size, and

logged date.
•• Delete: Deletes the selected log file.
•• Delete All: Deletes all log files.

1-11
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating RTTY (FSK)

DDRTTY DECODE LOG SET screen

In this screen, you can set the log file type, time stamp File Type (Default: Text)
setting, and other RTTY settings. Selects the file type to save a log onto an SD card
from Text and HTML.
1. Display the RTTY DECODE LOG screen. LLYou cannot change the file type while logging.
» DECODE > <1> > LOG

2. Touch “Log Set.” Time Stamp (Default: ON)

Selects whether or not to add the time stamp (date,
transmission time, and reception time) in the log.
•• ON: Adds the time stamp in the log.
•• OFF: Does not add the time stamp.

Time Stamp (Time) (Default: Local)

Selects whether to save the log with the local time or
3. Touch the item to set. (Example: File Type) with the UTC time.

Time Stamp (Frequency) (Default: ON)

Selects whether or not to add the frequency in the log.
•• ON: Adds the frequency.
•• OFF: Does not add the frequency.

4. Touch the option to set. (Example: HTML)

5. To close the RTTY DECODE LOG SET screen,

push several times.

TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching

the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on
the QUICK MENU screen.

1-12
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating RTTY (FSK)

DDRTTY DECODE SET screen

In this screen, you can set the log file type, time stamp FFT Scope Averaging (Default: OFF)
setting, and other RTTY settings. Sets the FFT scope waveform averaging function to
between 2 and 4, or OFF.
1. Display the RTTY DECODE screen. LLUse the default or smaller FFT scope waveform number
» DECODE for tuning.

2. Touch [EXPD/SET] for 1 second.

FFT Scope Waveform Color
 (Default: R: 51, G: 153, B: 255)
Sets the waveform color for the FFT scope.
LLTouch and select the R (Red), G (Green), or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate to adjust the level from 0
to 255.
LLThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.
•• Opens the RTTY DECODE SET screen.
3. Touch the item to set.
(Example: FFT Scope Averaging) Decode USOS (Default: ON)
Turns the letter code decoding capability ON or OFF
after receiving a “space.”
LLUSOS stands for UnShift On Space function.
•• ON: Decodes as a letter code.
•• OFF: Decodes as a character code.

Decode New Line Code (Default: CR, LF, CR+LF)

4. Touch the option to set. (Example: 2) Selects the internal RTTY decoder new line code.
LLCR stands for Carriage Return, and LF stands for Line
Feed.
•• CR,LF,CR+LF: Makes a new line with any code.
•• CR+LF: Makes a new line with only a
CR+LF code.

TX USOS (Default: ON)

Explicitly inserts the FIGS character, even though it is
not required by the receiving station.
5. To close the RTTY DECODE SET screen, push •• ON: Inserts FIGS.
several times. •• OFF: Does not insert FIGS.

TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching Font Color (Receive)
the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on  (Default: R: 128, G: 255, B: 128)
the QUICK MENU screen. Font Color (Transmit)
 (Default: R: 255, G: 106, B: 106)
Sets the text font color for received or transmit
characters.
LLTouch and select the R (Red), G (Green), or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate to adjust the level from 0
to 255.
LLThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.

1-13
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating ATV
1200 MHz and higher bands 4. Set the operating mode to ATV.
The IC-905 has ATV (Amateur TV) in the analog 5. Set the operating frequency.
FM mode. You can receive video signals from other 6. To display the transmitted and received video,
stations or transmitters for video, or transmit video open the VIDEO screen.
and audio signals input from external devices. » VIDEO

LLInformation
•• You cannot receive and transmit signals in the analog
AM ATV mode. The conventional transceivers (IC-1271A/
IC-1271E/IC-1275A/IC-1275E) are compatible with only
ATV in the analog AM mode.
•• Input video from the [AV-IN] jack to transmit.
•• You can output the received video to an external device
connected to the [AV-OUT] jack.

1. Connect an external device to the [AV-IN] jack.

Connection example:
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) 4 pole plug to
RCA connector cable (User supplied)
(Red)
To [AV-IN] jack
Audio (White)
Camera
Video (Yellow)
LLTo display the received or transmitted video in full-
screen mode, touch the RX Video zone or the TX
(Red) Video zone, and touch again or push to cancel
To [AV-OUT] Audio (White)
the full-screen mode.
jack
Video (Yellow) When receiving signals in ATV mode
Monitor The received video is displayed on the RX Video
To output the received video
zone, left side of the VIDEO screen.
LLWhen you transmit only video signals, you do not LLIf the received video is corrupted, change the IF filter
need to connect the audio plug (white). setting or “AV-OUT Video Output Level.”
LLYou can select the connector(s) to input the » VIDEO > SET > Video Level >
modulation signal in the ATV mode. AV-OUT Video Output Level
(Default: MIC, AV-IN)
» SET > Connectors > MOD Input > To transmit signals in ATV mode
ATV MOD The video input from the external device is displayed
on the TX Video zone, right side of the VIDEO screen.
You can adjust the modulation input level of the
[AV-IN] jack. Hold down [PTT] to transmit, and release to return to
» SET > Connectors > MOD Input > receive.
•• The TX indicator lights red while transmitting.
AV-IN MOD Level
2. Select the audio subcarrier frequency. TIP:
» SET > Function > •• When the TX indicator blinks red, and you cannot
transmit in the ATV mode, the input from the [AV-IN] jack
ATV Audio Sub Carrier Frequency
is excessive (over deviation). To transmit, set “AV-IN
LLSet the same subcarrier frequency between the caller Video Input Level” to a lower level.
station and the called station. » VIDEO > SET > Video Level >
LLWhen you receive or transmit only video signals, set AV-IN Video Input Level
to “OFF.”
LLWhen inputting PAL or SECAM video, “ATV Audio •• When the audio subcarrier frequency is set to “6.5MHz,”
Sub Carrier Frequency” is set to “4.5 MHz,” and DO NOT set the IF filter to FIL 3 (5 MHz). If the IF
interference occurs with audio and video signals. In filter is set to FIL 3, no audio is heard while receiving
that case, change the input device to a one that uses because the audio subcarrier is out of the passband.
a compatible video format standard, or set “ATV Audio LLWhen transmitting, the audio subcarrier’s signal
Sub Carrier Frequency” to other than “4.5 MHz.” strength level may become low, but the called station
3. Set the operating band. can hear the audio if its IF filter is set to FIL 1.

1-14
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Operating ATV

DDVIDEO SET screen

In this screen, you can set the VIDEO settings. AV-IN Video Input Level (Default: 50%)
Sets the video signal input level from an external
1. Display the VIDEO screen. device connected to the [AV-IN] jack.
» VIDEO LLThis setting also affects the video signal modulation
level. If you set this level too high, your transmitted
2. Touch [SET]. video signals may be displayed too dark on the received
station’s device.
LLAdjust this level to avoid excessive input from the [AV-IN]
jack (over deviation), depending on the connected device.

AV-OUT Video Output Level (Default: 50%)

3. Touch the item to open its setting screen.
(Example: Video Level) Sets the video signal output level to an external
device connected to the [AV-OUT] jack.
LLThis setting also affects the brightness of the received
video that is displayed on the controller’s screen.

View Mode (Default: Full)

Selects the view mode for the VIDEO screen.
•• Normal: Displays a 4:3 image in a 4:3 ratio.
•• Full: Expands a 4:3 image horizontally to fit the
4. Touch the item to set. display area (16:9).
(Example: AV-IN Video Input Level) •• Zoom: Expands a 4:3 image proportionately. Use
to expand the letter box format image
(image with black top and bottom) to fit the
display area without changing the ratio.

5. Touch the option to set. (Example: 70%)

6. To close the VIDEO SET screen, push

several times.

TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching

the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on
the QUICK MENU screen.

1-15
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Tone squelch operation

FM mode About the Tone squelch types indication
The Tone squelch opens only when you receive a TSQL: Tone Squelch function
signal that includes a matching subaudible tone in the DTCS(T)/TSQL(R) (“D” in “D-TSQL” blinks):
FM mode. You can silently wait for calls from other DTCS code in TX, Tone squelch in RX
stations using the same tone. TONE(T)/TSQL(R) (“T” in “T-TSQL” blinks):
When you transmit, the tone frequency is Repeater tone in TX, Tone squelch in RX
superimposed on your own signal.

1. Push . Checking another station’s tone frequency

•• Opens the FUNCTION screen. You can check another station’s tone frequency by
2. Touch [TONE]. tone scanning while the station is transmitting.

1. Touch [T-SCAN].

3. Touch the Tone squelch type. (Example: TSQL)

Blinks while scanning

•• The scan starts, and then stops when the matching

tone frequency from the other station is received.
2. To close the TONE FREQUENCY screen, push
.

4. Touch [TONE] for 1 second. Selectable tone frequencies

67.0 88.5 114.8 151.4 177.3 203.5 250.3
69.3 91.5 118.8 156.7 179.9 206.5 254.1
71.9 94.8 123.0 159.8 183.5 210.7
74.4 97.4 127.3 162.2 186.2 218.1
77.0 100.0 131.8 165.5 189.9 225.7
79.7 103.5 136.5 167.9 192.8 229.1
82.5 107.2 141.3 171.3 196.6 233.6
85.4 110.9 146.2 173.8 199.5 241.8

5. Rotate to set the tone frequency.

1-16
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

DTCS code squelch operation

FM mode About the DTCS code types indication
The Tone squelch opens only when you receive a DTCS: DTCS Code function
signal that includes a matching DTCS code in the DTCS(T) (“DTCS” blinks):
FM mode. You can silently wait for calls from other DTCS code in TX, Tone off in RX
stations using the same tone. TONE(T)/DTCS(R) (“T” in “T-DTCS” blinks):
When you transmit, the DTCS code is superimposed Repeater tone in TX, DTCS code squelch in RX
on your own signal. DTCS(T)/TSQL(R) (“D” in “D-TSQL” blinks):
DTCS code in TX, Tone squelch in RX
1. Push .
•• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
2. Touch [TONE]. Checking another station’s DTCS code
You can check another station’s tone code by tone
scanning while the station is transmitting.

1. Touch [T-SCAN].

3. Touch the DTCS code type. (Example: DTCS)

Blinks while scanning

•• The scan starts, and then stops when the matching

DTCS code from the other station is received.
2. To close the TONE FREQUENCY screen, push
.
4. Touch [TONE] for 1 second.
Selectable DTCS codes
023 054 125 165 245 274 356 445 506 627 732
025 065 131 172 246 306 364 446 516 631 734
026 071 132 174 251 311 365 452 523 632 743
031 072 134 205 252 315 371 454 526 654 754
032 073 143 212 255 325 411 455 532 662
036 074 145 223 261 331 412 462 546 664
043 114 152 225 263 332 413 464 565 703
047 115 155 226 265 343 423 465 606 712
051 116 156 243 266 346 431 466 612 723
053 122 162 244 271 351 432 503 624 731

5. Rotate to set a DTCS code.

1-17
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Repeater operation
A repeater receives your transceiver’s signals and DDChecking the repeater input signal
simultaneously retransmits them on a different You can check whether or not you can directly receive
frequency to provide a greater communication range. another station’s transmit signal, by listening to the
When using a repeater, the transmit frequency shifts repeater input frequency.
from the receive frequency by an offset amount. You LLWhile listening, the RX indicator lights green, and then the
can access a repeater using the split function. Noise Reduction and Notch Filter settings are canceled.

1. Select the VFO mode. While receiving, hold down to listen to the
2. Set the operating mode to “FM.” repeater input frequency.
3. Set the receive frequency (Repeater output
frequency).
For only the USA version: Receive frequency
When the Auto Repeater function is turned ON, steps is displayed.
4 and 5 are not necessary. The Auto Repeater function
automatically sets the repeater settings (duplex ON/
OFF, duplex direction, tone encoder ON/OFF). While holding down .
LLYou can turn OFF the function and manually set the
repeater settings.
» SET > Function > Auto Repeater

4. Set the Duplex direction and frequency offset.

•• See page 1-20 for setting details.
5. Turn ON the repeater tone, and set the repeater
tone frequency.
•• See page 1-19 for setting details.
6. Communicate in a normal way.
•• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit
signal.

TIP: To access a repeater using the DR function, see

Section 10 for details.

1-18
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Repeater operation

DDSetting the repeater tone frequency

Most repeaters require a subaudible tone to be Checking the repeater tone frequency
accessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on You can check the tone frequency by receiving the
your signal, and must be set in advance. repeater’s input frequency using the tone scan. To
Do the following steps to set the tone frequency. receive the input signals, the transceiver detects
the subaudible tone frequency using the tone scan
1. Push . function.
•• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
2. Touch [TONE]. 1. Touch [T-SCAN].

Blinks while scanning

•• The scan starts, and then stops when the matching

tone frequency from the repeater is received.
3. Touch “TONE.” 2. To close the TONE FREQUENCY screen, push
.

DD1750 Hz tone burst

A 1750 Hz tone is required to access many European
•• Turns ON the repeater tone. Repeaters.
4. Touch [TONE] for 1 second. LLThis operation is only for the EUR version.

1. Assign “T-CALL” to the microphone’s key on the

REMOTE MIC KEY screen.
» SET > Function > Remote MIC Key

2. Set the operating mode to “FM.”

3. While holding down [PTT] to transmit, push the
key that “T-CALL” is assigned to.
•• Accesses the repeater with a short tone burst.
•• Displays “1750Hz TONE.”
4. Operate in a normal way.

5. Rotate to set the desired subaudible

tone frequency.

Selectable tone frequencies

67.0 88.5 114.8 151.4 177.3 203.5 250.3
69.3 91.5 118.8 156.7 179.9 206.5 254.1
71.9 94.8 123.0 159.8 183.5 210.7
74.4 97.4 127.3 162.2 186.2 218.1
77.0 100.0 131.8 165.5 189.9 225.7
79.7 103.5 136.5 167.9 192.8 229.1
82.5 107.2 141.3 171.3 196.6 233.6
85.4 110.9 146.2 173.8 199.5 241.8

1-19
1 ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Duplex operation Data communication

The Duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency SSB-DATA, AM-DATA, and FM-DATA modes
up or down from the receive frequency by an offset You can operate the data mode using AFSK (Audio
amount. Frequency Shift Keying).
LLWhen operating PSK31, SSTV, or JT65B with a PC
•• OFF: F
 or simplex operation (the receive and application software, refer to the software’s instruction
transmit frequencies are the same). manual.
•• DUP–: The transmit frequency shifts down from the
receive frequency by the offset amount. 1. Connect a PC or other device to the transceiver.
•• DUP+: The transmit frequency shifts up from the LLSee page 16-2 for details.
receive frequency by the offset amount. 2. Set the operating frequency and mode.
3. Refer to the application software for
1. Push . communication details.
•• Opens the FUNCTION screen. LLWhen operating in the SSB data mode, adjust the
device’s output level within the ALC zone.
2. Touch 2 at the bottom of the screen.
3. Touch [DUP].
TIP: The carrier point is displayed when operating
AFSK in the SSB data mode.
See the illustration below for a tone-pair example.

LLTouching [DUP] changes between “DUP–,” “DUP+,”

and OFF.
4. Touch [DUP] for 1 second.

5. Enter the frequency offset, and then touch [ENT].

NOTE: For only USA version:

When the Auto Repeater function is ON, and the
operating frequency is set out of the Repeater output
frequency range, the duplex mode is automatically
canceled.
» SET > Function > Auto Repeater

1-20
Section 2 SCOPE OPERATION (ADVANCED)
Spectrum scope screen��������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-2
DD Adjusting the sweep speed�������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-2
DD Adjusting the Reference level����������������������������������������������������������������������������2-2
SCOPE SET screen�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-3
Audio scope screen��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-6
DD AUDIO SCOPE SET screen������������������������������������������������������������������������������2-6

2-1
2 SCOPE OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Spectrum scope screen

DDAdjusting the sweep speed DDAdjusting the Reference level
Select the sweep speed to change the FFT scope When monitoring a weak signal that is buried in the
refresh speed and the waterfall speed. noise floor, or monitoring a strong signal but some
LLTo change only the waterfall speed, select “Slow,” “Mid,” stronger signals are nearby, adjusting the Reference
or “Fast” in the Waterfall Speed. level of the screen helps you to see these signals.
•• Even if this setting is changed, it does not affect the input
1. Display the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen. signal level.
» SCOPE •• When you adjust the Reference level, the signal strength
for the waterfall also appears to change.
2. Touch [< 1 >] to display MENU 2. LLEach band memorizes the setting.
3. Touch [SPEED] several times until the desired
sweep speed is selected. 1. Display the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
•• Selectable speeds: FAST, MID, or SLOW » SCOPE
LL“,” “,” or “” indicates FAST, MID, or SLOW.
LLA popup window is displayed in the center of the 2. Touch [< 1 >] to display MENU 2.
SPECTRUM SCOPE screen and displays the 3. Touch [REF].
selected sweep speed for 1 second.
“,” “,” or “” is displayed.

4. Rotate to adjust the level.

•• Adjustable range: –20.0 dB ~ +20.0 dB
LLYou can reset to ±0.0 dB by touching [DEF] for 1
second.
5. To close the REF Level window, touch [REF].

The difference in the spectrum

Reference level
(+20.0 dB) (–20.0 dB)

+20.0 dB
±0.0 dB
–20.0 dB

LLIf you adjust this setting to a positive level, all signal

levels appear stronger. Or, if you adjust to a negative
level, all signal levels appear weaker.

2-2
2 SCOPE OPERATION (ADVANCED)

SCOPE SET screen

This screen is used to set the waveform color, Scope Scope during Tx (CENTER Type) (Default: ON)
range for the Fixed mode, and so on. Turns the TX signal display ON or OFF.

1. Display the SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.

» SCOPE Max Hold (Default: 10s Hold)
Selects the Peak Level Holding function.
2. Touch [EXPD/SET] for 1 second. •• OFF: Turns OFF the Peak Level Holding
function.
•• 10s Hold: Holds the peak spectrum for 10 seconds.
•• ON: Continuously holds the peak spectrum.

CENTER Type Display (Default: Filter Center)

Selects the center frequency of the SPECTRUM
SCOPE screen. (Only in the Center mode)
•• Filter Center:
Displays the selected filter’s center frequency
3. Touch the item to set. (Example: Max Hold) in the center of the SPECTRUM SCOPE
screen.
•• Carrier Point Center:
Displays the carrier point frequency of the
selected operating mode in the center of the
SPECTRUM SCOPE screen.
•• Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.):
In addition to the carrier point center setting
above, the actual frequency is displayed at
4. Touch the option to set. (Example: ON) the bottom of the scope.
LLAbs. Freq. : Absolute Frequency

Marker Position (FIX Type/SCROLL Type)

 (Default: Carrier Point)
Selects the marker position on the SPECTRUM
SCOPE screen. (Only in the Fixed or Scroll mode)
•• Filter Center: Displays the Marker on the selected
filter’s center frequency.
LLSee the right for details on the setting items and their •• Carrier Point: Displays the Marker on the carrier
options.
point frequency of the selected
5. To close the SCOPE SET screen, push .
operating mode.

TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching

VBW (Default: Narrow)
the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on
the QUICK MENU screen. Selects the Video Band Width (VBW).
•• Narrow: Sets the VBW to narrow.
•• Wide: Sets the VBW to wide.

Averaging (Default: OFF)

Sets the FFT scope Waveform Averaging function to
between 2 and 4, or OFF.
•• OFF: The FFT scope screen refreshes on each
sweep. This setting displays the critical
spectrum view.
•• 2, 3, 4: The FFT scope screen averages 2 to 4
sweeps to smoothly display the spectrum.

2-3
2 SCOPE OPERATION (ADVANCED)

SCOPE SET screen

Waveform Type (Default: Fill) Waterfall Size (Expand Screen) (Default: Mid)
Selects the outline waveform display for the FFT Selects the Waterfall height in the Expand scope
scope screen. screen.
•• Fill: Displays only the waveform, in color. •• Small: The same height as the Normal scope
•• Fill+Line: Displays both the waveform and the screen, only the FFT scope expands.
outline, in color. •• Mid: The Waterfall height expands at the same
ratio as the FFT scope.
•• Large: Only the Waterfall height expands.
Waveform Color (Current)
 (Default: (R) 172 (G) 191 (B) 191)
Sets the waveform color for the currently received Waterfall Peak Color Level (Default: Grid 8)
signals. Selects the signal level that the Waterfall displays a
LLTouch and select the R (Red), G (Green), or B (Blue) peak color.
scale, and then rotate to adjust the level from 0 Higher signal levels are Red, Yellow, Green, Light-
to 255. blue, Blue, and Black, in that order.
LLThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale. •• Select between Grid 1 and Grid 8.

Waveform Color (Line) Waterfall Marker Auto-hide (Default: ON)

 (Default: (R) 56 (G) 24 (B) 0)
Turns the Waterfall Marker Auto-hide function ON or
Sets the waveform outline color for the currently OFF.
received signals. •• OFF: The marker in the Waterfall zone stays ON.
LLTouch and select the R (Red), G (Green), or B (Blue)
•• ON: The marker in the Waterfall zone is hidden 2
scale, and then rotate to adjust the level from 0
seconds after it stops in place.
to 255.
LLThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.

Waveform Color (Max Hold)

 (Default: (R) 45 (G) 86 (B) 115)
Sets the waveform color for the received signals
maximum level.
LLTouch and select the R (Red), G (Green), or B (Blue)
scale, and then rotate to adjust the level from 0
to 255.
LLThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.

Waterfall Display (Default: ON)

Turns the Waterfall display ON or OFF for the normal
scope or Mini scope screen.
LLOn the Expanded scope screen, the Waterfall is always
displayed.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the Waterfall display.
•• ON: Turns ON the Waterfall display.

Waterfall Speed (Default: Mid)

Selects the Waterfall speed.
•• Slow:Sets the Waterfall speed to Slow.
•• Mid: Sets the Waterfall speed to Mid.
•• Fast: Sets the Waterfall speed to Fast.

2-4
2 SCOPE OPERATION (ADVANCED)

SCOPE SET screen

Fixed Edges
144M (Default: No.1 144.000–144.500 MHz) 10G (Default: No.1 10296.000–10296.800 MHz)
 (Default: No.2 146.020–147.020 MHz)  (Default: No.2 10297.000–10298.000 MHz)
 (Default: No.3 145.800–146.000 MHz)  (Default: No.3 10260.000–10261.000 MHz)
 (Default: No.4 144.000–144.200 MHz)  (Default: No.4 10260.000–10260.500 MHz)
Sets the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies in the •• Settable range: 10000.000 ~ 10500.000 MHz
Fixed or Scroll-F mode. Four edges are assigned to
each band.
NOTE:
•• First set the lower Edge frequency.
•• Set the upper Edge frequency within 50 MHz of the
lower frequency.

•• Settable range: 144.000 ~ 148.000 MHz

LLTouch to select the upper and lower edge

frequency, and then rotate or touch the
keypad to edit the frequency.

430M (Default: No.1 432.000–433.000 MHz)

 (Default: No.2 445.500–446.500 MHz)
 (Default: No.3 435.000–436.000 MHz)
 (Default: No.4 430.000–430.200 MHz)
•• Settable range: 430.000 ~ 450.000 MHz

1200M (Default: No.1 1295.800–1296.800 MHz)

 (Default: No.2 1294.000–1295.000 MHz)
 (Default: No.3 1269.000–1270.000 MHz)
 (Default: No.4 1260.000–1260.500 MHz)
•• Settable range: 1240.000 ~ 1300.000 MHz

2400M (Default: No.1 2396.000–2396.800 MHz)

 (Default: No.2 2397.500–2398.000 MHz)
 (Default: No.3 2400.000–2401.000 MHz)
 (Default: No.4 2400.000–2400.500 MHz)
•• Settable range: 2300.000 ~ 2450.000 MHz

5600M (Default: No.1 5796.000–5796.800 MHz)

 (Default: No.2 5797.000–5798.000 MHz)
 (Default: No.3 5760.000–5761.000 MHz)
 (Default: No.4 5760.000–5760.500 MHz)
•• Settable range: 5650.000 ~ 5925.000 MHz

2-5
2 SCOPE OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Audio scope screen

This Audio scope enables you to display the received DDAUDIO SCOPE SET screen
signal’s frequency component on the FFT scope, and This screen is used to set the FFT scope waveform
its waveform components on the Oscilloscope. The type, color, Waterfall display, and oscilloscope
FFT scope also has a waterfall. waveform color.
Display the AUDIO SCOPE screen. 1. Display the AUDIO SCOPE screen.
» AUDIO » AUDIO

2. Touch [EXPD/SET] for 1 second.

•• AUDIO SCOPE screen 3. Touch the item to set.
FFT scope zone (Example: FFT Scope Waveform Type)

Waterfall zone Oscilloscope

4. Touch the option to set.

Key Action LLSee below for details on the setting items and their
options.
Selects the attenuator for the FFT
5. To close the AUDIO SCOPE SET screen, push
Touch scope.
•• 0 (OFF), 10, 20, or 30 dB .
ATT
Touch for TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching
Turns OFF the attenuator. (0 dB)
1 second the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on
Turns the Hold function ON or OFF. the QUICK MENU screen.
HOLD •• HOLD is displayed and freezes the current
audio spectrum.
Selects the Oscilloscope level. FFT Scope Waveform Type (Default: Fill)
LEVEL
•• 0, –10, –20, or –30 dB Selects the type of waveform for the FFT scope.
Selects the Oscilloscope sweep time. •• Line: Only the waveform outline is drawn.
TIME
•• 1, 3, 10, 30, 100, or 300 ms/Div •• Fill: The full waveform is drawn in color.
Selects the Expanded or Normal
Touch
screen.
FFT Scope Waveform Color
EXPD/SET Displays the AUDIO SCOPE SET  (Default: (R) 51 (G) 153 (B) 255)
Touch for screen.
1 second LLSee the Advanced manual for
Sets the waveform color for the FFT scope.
LLTouch and select the R (Red), G (Green), or B (Blue) scale,
details.
and then rotate to adjust the level from 0 to 255.
LLThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.

FFT Scope Waterfall Display (Default: ON)

Turns the Waterfall display ON or OFF.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the Waterfall display.
•• ON: Turns ON the Waterfall display.

Oscilloscope Waveform Color

 (Default: (R) 0 (G) 255 (B) 0)
Sets the waveform color for the Oscilloscope.
LLTouch and select the R (Red), G (Green), or B (Blue) scale,
and then rotate to adjust the level from 0 to 255.
LLThe color is displayed in the box above the RGB scale.

2-6
Section 3 SD CARD (ADVANCED)
Loading the saved data files�������������������������������������������������������������������������3-2
Deleting a data file����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3-3
Displaying the SD card information��������������������������������������������������������������3-3
Importing or Exporting a CSV format file������������������������������������������������������3-4
DD Importing�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3-4
DD Exporting�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3-5
About the SD card’s folders��������������������������������������������������������������������������3-6

3-1
3 SD CARD (ADVANCED)

Loading the saved data files

You can load the Memory channels and transceiver’s 5. Touch “<<Load>>.”
settings from the SD card to the transceiver.
LLThe transceiver has “ALL” and “Select” loading options to
choose from.

TIP: Saving the current data is recommended before

loading other data into the transceiver.
(Basic manual)

6. Touch [YES] or [NO].

1. Open the LOAD SETTING screen.
» SET > SD Card > Load Setting

2. Touch the file to load.

LLWhen you touch [YES], the skip settings of the

repeater list are retained.
LLWhen you touch [NO], the skip settings of the
repeater list are cleared.
3. Touch “Select.” 7. Touch [YES].

L you want to load all the contents on the LOAD OPTION

LIf
screen, touch “ALL” and go to step 6. LLAfter the loading ends, “COMPLETED! Restart the
L you want to load only the repeater list, touch “Repeater List
LIf IC-905.” is displayed.
Only” and go to step 6. LLWhen you select “REF Adjust” in step 4, “The new
4. Touch the loading options. “REF Adjust” setting will be saved” is displayed.
(Example: CI-V Address) 8. Turn OFF the transceiver, then turn it ON again to
restart the transceiver.

•• “✓” is displayed on the left side of the selected option.

LLThe Set mode settings and Memory channel contents
are always loaded.

3-2
3 SD CARD (ADVANCED)

Deleting a data file Displaying the SD card

information
Follow the steps below to delete the files you no
longer need on the SD card. You can display the SD card capacity, and the time
remaining for voice recording.
NOTE: Deleted data from a card cannot be recalled.
Before deleting any data, back up the card data onto 1. Open the SD CARD screen.
another device. » SET > SD Card

2. Touch “SD Card Info.”

1. Open the SAVE SETTING screen.
» SET > SD Card > Save Setting

2. Touch the file to delete for 1 second.

3. Touch “Delete.”

•• Displays the card’s free space and capacity.

3. To close the SD CARD INFO screen, push
several times.

LLTo delete all files, touch “Delete All.”

LLTo cancel deleting, push .
4. Touch [YES].

5. To close the SAVE SETTING screen, push

several times.

TIP: Checking the file information

Touch “File Information” on the QUICK MENU screen
to display the file name, size, and the saved date.

3-3
3 SD CARD (ADVANCED)

Importing or Exporting a CSV format file

Please read this section before importing or exporting DDImporting
a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format file from the 1. Open the IMPORT/EXPORT screen.
SD card. » SET > SD Card > Import/Export
You can import or export the following data:
•• Memory CH 2. Touch “Import.”
•• Your Call Sign Memory
•• Repeater List
•• GPS Memory

NOTE:
•• Before importing, make a backup file of all the
transceiver’s data to the SD card in case of data loss.
•• The transceiver cannot display a file that has a file name
longer than 24 characters. In this case, rename it using 3. Touch the data to import.
23 characters or less. When you export the data in a (Example: Your Call Sign)
CSV format file using the CS-905, BE SURE to name it
using 23 characters or less.

4. Touch the CSV file to import.

TIP: When importing a repeater list, “Keep

‛SKIP’ settings in Repeater List?” is displayed.
See step 6 on page 3-2 for details.

5. Touch [YES].

•• After the importing ends, “COMPLETED! Restart the

IC-905.” is displayed.
6. Turn OFF the transceiver, then turn it ON again to
restart the transceiver.

3-4
3 SD CARD (ADVANCED)

Importing or Exporting a CSV format file

DDExporting
1. Open the IMPORT/EXPORT screen. 5. To save the file with the displayed name, touch
» SET > SD Card > Import/Export [ENT].
2. Touch “Export.”

LLIf you want to change the name, delete the name and
reenter it, and then touch [ENT].
3. Touch the data to export.
6. Touch [YES].
(Example: Your Call Sign)

7. To close the EXPORT screen, push several

4. Touch “<<New File>>.”
times.

LLThe file name is automatically set in the following

format: Your*yyyymmdd_xx
(yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd: day, xx: serial number).
* “Mch” is displayed for a Memory channel contents.
“Rpt” is displayed for a repeater list.
“Gps” is displayed for a GPS memory.

3-5
3 SD CARD (ADVANCED)

About the SD card’s folders

The folder in the SD card contains the following. •• IC-905 folder
The folders created in the IC-905 are contained in this
folder.
•• Capture folder
IC-905 Capture The captured screen data in the “png” or “bmp” format.
•• Csv folder
The GPS Memory, Memory channel, Repeater List, and
Csv GpsMemory Your (UR) call sign memory folders.
•• GpsMemory folder
The GPS Memory in the “csv” format.
MemoryCh
•• MemoryCh folder
The Memory channel contents in the “csv” format.
•• RptList folder
RptList
The Repeater List in the “csv” format.
•• YourMemory folder
YourMemory Your (UR) call sign memory in the “csv” format.
•• CX-10G folder
The CX-10G’s firmware data in the “dat” format.
CX-10G •• Decode folder
The RTTY decode log folder.
•• RTTY folder
Decode Rtty The transmitted or received RTTY decode log data in the
“txt” or “html” format.
•• Picture folder
Picture Private Rx
The pictures in the “jpg” format that are used with the
Share Pictures function.
QsoLog Tx •• Private folder
The RX Picture History and TX Picture History.
•• Rx folder
Reply The RX Picture History in the “dat” format.
LLThe RX Picture History contents are not displayed on
the PC.
RxLog •• Tx folder
The TX Picture History in the “dat” format.
LLThe TX Picture History contents are not displayed on
Setting the PC.
•• QSOLog
The QSO log data in the “csv” format.
Voice yyyymmdd •• Reply folder
The Automatic reply data in the “wav” format.
•• RxLog folder
VoiceTx yyyymmdd
The RX record log data in the “csv” format.
•• Setting folder
The transceiver’s setting data in the “icf” format.
•• Voice folder
The recorded QSO audio date folders.
•• yyyymmdd folder
The recorded audio file in the “wav” format.
The folder name is automatically created in the following
format: yyyymmdd (yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day)
•• VoiceTx folder
The recorded voice audio data for the Voice TX function
in the “wav” format.

3-6
Section 4 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Recording a QSO audio�������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-2
DD Quick recording�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-2
DD Basic recording��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-2
Playing back a QSO audio���������������������������������������������������������������������������4-3
Checking the folder or file information����������������������������������������������������������4-4
Deleting files�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-5
Deleting folders��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-5
RECORDER SET screen�����������������������������������������������������������������������������4-6
PLAYER SET screen������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-7
Playing back audio on a PC�������������������������������������������������������������������������4-7

4-1
4 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

Recording a QSO audio

This transceiver is equipped with a QSO recorder not DDQuick recording
only for the receive audio but also for the transmit You can quickly record the received audio.
audio.
This function is useful to make a QSO record, or 1. Push .
to confirm your QSO with a rare entity’s station, or •• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
on a DX’pedition. You can also use the function to 2. Touch “<<REC Start>>.”
repeatedly transmit the same voice message.
The recorded contents are saved onto an SD card.

There are 2 ways to start recording.

zz Push and touch “<<REC Start>>.”
zz Push and touch [RECORD].
LLThe recorded audio is saved in the “Voice” folder on the
SD card.
LLWhen “PTT Auto REC” is set to ON, the recording •• Starts recording.
automatically starts when you start transmitting. •• “Recording started.” is briefly displayed.
» RECORD > Recorder Set > PTT Auto REC LLTo stop recording, open the QUICK MENU screen
again and touch “<<REC Stop>>.”

TIP: About the icons

•• While recording, “�” is displayed and the SD card icon
next to the clock blinks blue.
“�” is displayed. The SD card icon blinks. DDBasic recording
You can record both receive and transmit audio.

1. Open the QSO RECORDER screen.

» RECORD
•• While pausing, “〓” is displayed.
2. Touch “<<REC Start>>.”
“〓” is displayed.

NOTE:
•• To record a QSO, an SD card (user supplied) is
•• Starts recording.
required.
•• “Recording started.” is briefly displayed.
•• DO NOT remove the SD card from the transceiver while
LLTo stop recording, touch “<<REC Stop>>.”
recording. Otherwise, the recording stops, and the card
data may be corrupted or deleted. 3. To close the QSO RECORDER screen, push
•• Once the recording starts, it pauses and resumes if the .
transceiver is turned OFF and ON again.
•• The recording continues until you touch <<REC Stop>>,
or the free space on the SD card has run out.
•• When the recording file’s content becomes 2 GB, the
transceiver continues to record, but to a new file.

4-2
4 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

Playing back a QSO audio

You can playback the recorded QSO audio. Key Action
Plays the previous file.
1. Insert the SD card in which the recorded audio is LLWhile the oldest file is playing back,
saved. pushing starts playing the beginning of
2. Open the PLAY FILES screen. the oldest file, even if there are other files in
» RECORD > Play Files the folder.

3. Touch the folder where the file you want to Plays the next file.
LLWhile the most recent file is playing back,
playback is saved.
pushing stops the playback, even if
there are other files in the folder.
Rewinds to the skip time point.
(Default: 10 seconds)
LLIf you touch within the first 1 second of
the file, the end of the previously recorded
file will play back.
Fast forwards to the skip time point.
(Default: 10 seconds)
LLThe folder is named in the following format:
Pauses while playing
yyyymmdd (yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd: day).
LL is displayed while pausing.
4. Touch the desired file.
Plays the file.
LL is displayed while playing.

LLYou can change the skip time in the following item.

» RECORD > Player Set > Skip Time

Operating frequency and operating mode

Recording start
time and date The number of file

The TX/RX
status of the
recorded audio

Total time

•• Starts a playback.
LLThe file is named in the following format: Play back time
yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd:
day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second). Play back icon
LLPlayback continues to the next file and stops when
the last file in the folder is played back.
5. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
several times.

4-3
4 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

Checking the folder or file information

You can check the folder information and recorded file Checking the folder information
information, that are listed below. 1. Open the PLAY FILES screen.
» RECORD > Play Files
Folder information
2. Touch a folder for 1 second.
•• Number of the saved files
•• Total size
•• Created date

RX audio file information

•• Operating frequency
•• Operating mode •• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
•• Operating information (RX) 3. Touch “Folder Information.”
•• Recorded date and time
•• Your position*
•• Repeater call sign*
•• Caller’s call sign*
•• S-meter
•• Caller’s Position data*

TX audio file information

•• Operating frequency •• The FOLDER INFORMATION screen is displayed.
•• Operating mode 4. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
•• Operating information (TX) several times.
•• RF Power
•• Recorded date and time
•• Your position* Checking the file information
•• Repeater call sign* 1. Open the PLAY FILES screen.
•• Call sign of the called station* » RECORD > Play Files

* Depending on the recording status, this item may not be 2. Touch a folder.
displayed.

3. Touch a file to check its information for 1 second.

•• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.

4. Touch “File Information.”

•• The FILE INFORMATION screen is displayed.

5. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
several times.

4-4
4 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

Deleting files Deleting folders

1. Open the PLAY FILES screen.
NOTE: All the files in the folder are also deleted.
» RECORD > Play Files

2. Touch the folder where the file you want to delete

is saved. 1. Open the PLAY FILES screen.
» RECORD > Play Files

2. Touch the folder you want to delete for 1 second.

3. Touch the file that you want to delete for 1 second.

•• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.

3. Touch “Delete.”

•• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.

4. Touch “Delete.”

LLIf you want to delete all folders, touch “Delete All

Folders.”
4. Touch [YES].

LLIf you want to delete all files in the selected folder,

touch “Delete All.”
5. Touch [YES].

•• The folder is deleted and returns to the previous

screen.
5. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
several times.

•• The file is deleted and returns to the previous screen.

6. To close the PLAY FILES screen, push
several times.

4-5
4 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

RECORDER SET screen

You can change the recorder settings on this screen. File Split (Default: ON)
Turns the File Split function ON or OFF.
1. Display the RECORDER SET screen. •• OFF: The audio is continuously recorded into the
» RECORD > Recorder Set file, even if you switch between transmit
and receive, or the squelch status changes
2. Touch the item to set. (Example: TX REC Audio)
between open and closed.
When the recording file’s size becomes 2 GB,
the transceiver continues to record, but to a
new file.
•• ON: While recording, if you switch between
transmit and receive, or the squelch status
changes between open and closed, a new file
is automatically created in the same folder,
and the audio is saved into the new one.
3. Touch the option to set. (Example: Monitor)

PTT Auto REC (Default: ON)

Turns the PTT Automatic Recording function ON or
OFF.
•• OFF: The recording does not start, even when a
signal is transmitted.
•• ON: The recording automatically starts when a
signal is transmitted.
4. To close the RECORDER SET screen, push .
The recording will stop when:
TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching •• 10 seconds has passed after the last transmission.
the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on •• 10 seconds has passed if no signal is received after
the QUICK MENU screen. the last transmission.
- If you receive a signal within 10 seconds after
the last transmission, the received audio is also
recorded.
TX REC Audio (Default: Direct) - If you receive another signal within 10 seconds
Selects the transmit audio to record. after the last reception, the received audio is also
•• Direct: Records the microphone audio. recorded.
•• Monitor: Records the TX monitor audio. •• 10 minutes has past while operating with the
squelch is open in the SSB, CW, RTTY, or AM
mode.
RX REC Condition (Default: Squelch Auto) •• The frequency or operating mode is changed.
Selects the recording setting for receive.
•• Always: Records even if no signal is received. PRE-REC for PTT Auto REC (Default: 10sec)
•• Squelch Auto: R
 ecords only when the squelch
opens. Selects whether or not to record the audio that is
(The recording will be paused when received before the PTT Automatic Recording function
the squelch closes while recording.) is activated.
•• OFF: Does not record the audio.
•• 5sec/10sec/15sec:
Records the audio that is previously received
in this set period of time.

4-6
4 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

PLAYER SET screen Playing back audio on a PC

You can fast forward or rewind while playing back. You You can also playback the voice memory data on a
can change the skip time in the PLAYER SET screen. PC.
LLThe recorded information (frequency, date, and so on) is
1. Display the PLAYER SET screen. not displayed.
» RECORD > Player Set
1. Insert the SD card into the memory card slot or
2. Touch “Skip Time.” memory card reader (user supplied) on your PC.

To the Card reader

PC SD card
Controller
3. Touch the option to set. (Example: 5sec)
2. Open the “Voice” folder.
LLSee page 3-6 for detail.
3. Open the folder where the file you want to
playback is saved.
LLThe folders are titled based on the recorded date.
(yyyymmdd)
4. Open the file that you want to play back.
•• The audio starts playing back.
4. To close the PLAYER SET screen, push . LLThe files are titled based on the date and time
(yyyymmdd_hhmmss.wav).

TIP: You can set the item to its default by touching

NOTE:
the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on
•• The operations while playing back may differ, depending
the QUICK MENU screen. on the application. Refer to the application’s instruction
manual for details.
•• When the file does not playback, even if you double
click the file, download an appropriate software
application. (Example: Windows Media® Player)

4-7
Section 5 VOICE TX MEMORY FUNCTION
Recording a Voice TX memory���������������������������������������������������������������������5-2
DD Recording����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-2
DD Playing back������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-3
Entering a Voice TX memory name��������������������������������������������������������������5-3
Transmitting a Voice TX memory content�����������������������������������������������������5-4
DD Transmitting�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-4
DD Repeatedly transmitting�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-4
DD Adjusting the output level����������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-5
VOICE TX SET screen���������������������������������������������������������������������������������5-5

5-1
5 VOICE TX MEMORY FUNCTION

Recording a Voice TX memory

SSB, AM, FM, DV, and ATV modes 5. Touch to start recording.
You can record up to 8 Voice transmit (TX) memories
(T1 ~ T8) onto an SD card. To transmit a recorded Adjust the Mic gain so that the “REC
content using a Voice TX memory, first record the Level” meter reads less than 80%.
message, as described below.
LLYou can record up to 1 and a half minutes in each
memory.
LLYou can also transmit the recorded content using an
external keypad.
NOTE: To use the Voice TX memory function, an SD
card (user supplied) is required.

DDRecording
1. Display the VOICE TX screen.
» VOICE Displayed while Touch to open the MIC GAIN
recording adjustment window.
2. Touch [REC/SET].

•• Without holding down [PTT], speak into the

microphone at your normal voice level.
LLPreviously recorded content is overwritten.
3. Touch “REC.”
6. Touch to stop recording.
7. To close the VOICE TX RECORD screen, push
several times.

TIP: How to clear the recorded content

Touch the Voice TX memory for 1 second in step 4,
and then touch “Clear” in the QUICK MENU screen.

•• Opens the VOICE TX RECORD screen.

4. Touch the desired Voice memory “T1” ~ “T8.”
(Example: T1)

5-2
5 VOICE TX MEMORY FUNCTION

Recording a Voice TX memory Entering a Voice TX memory name

DDPlaying back You can assign a name to recorded Voice TX
1. On the selected memory’s recording screen, memories.
touch to start playing back without
transmitting. Example: Entering “CQ CONTEST” in Memory T1
1. Display the VOICE TX RECORD screen.
» VOICE > REC/SET > REC

2. Touch the desired memory for 1 second.

Displayed while playing

3. Touch “Edit Name.”
LLTo stop the playback, touch .
2. To close the VOICE TX RECORD screen, push
several times.

•• Opens the Name editing screen.

4. Enter a name of up to 16 characters, and then
touch [ENT] to save.

LLSee “Keyboard entering and editing” in the Basic

manual for details.
5. To close the VOICE TX RECORD screen, push
.

5-3
5 VOICE TX MEMORY FUNCTION

Transmitting a Voice TX memory content

You can transmit the Voice TX memory contents once, DDRepeatedly transmitting
or repeatedly. This is useful for transmitting your call 1. Display the VOICE TX screen.
sign or name in some contests, or repeatedly calling » VOICE
CQ.
2. Touch the desired Voice memory key [T1] ~ [T8]
for 1 second.
DDTransmitting
Transmits the prerecorded content. (p. 5-2)

1. Display the VOICE TX screen.

» VOICE

2. Touch the desired Voice memory key [T1] ~ [T8].

Repeat icon The transmission’s remaining time

•• Repeatedly transmits the recorded content.

LLInformation
•• The recorded content is repeatedly transmitted for 10
minutes unless you manually stop transmission by
touching the selected memory.
The transmission’s remaining time •• The Memory Timer counts down.
•• is displayed while repeatedly transmitting.
•• You can set the pause interval between the repeated
•• Transmits the recorded content once.
transmissions in “Repeat Time” on the VOICE TX
3. To close the VOICE TX screen, push . SET screen. During this interval, the transceiver
returns to receive. (p. 5-5).
When an external keypad is connected: •• After 10 minutes have passed, and all of the recorded
You can transmit the preset contents in the Voice content in the memory is transmitted, the transceiver
TX memory (T1 ~ T8) from an external device by automatically returns to receive.
•• When a signal is received in the interval between
setting the “External Keypad,” and then connecting
transmissions, the transceiver pauses the next
an external keypad to the [ELEC-KEY] jack on the transmission until the signal disappears. However, if
IC-905. the squelch is set to open, the transceiver repeatedly
» SET > Connectors > External Keypad transmits after the repeat interval time expires, even
signals are received.
3. To close the VOICE TX screen, push .

TIP:
•• If the “DATA OFF MOD” is set to “USB” or “LAN,” Voice
TX memories can not be transmitted.
» SET > Connectors > MOD Input >
DATA OFF MOD
•• You cannot transmit the audio in the ATV mode
when “ATV Audio Sub Carrier Frequency” is set to
“OFF.”

5-4
5 VOICE TX MEMORY FUNCTION

Transmitting a Voice TX memory content VOICE TX SET screen

DDAdjusting the output level You can set the Automatic Monitor function and the
Adjust the Voice TX memory level. Transmit Repeat Interval on this screen.

1. Display the VOICE TX screen. 1. Display the VOICE TX SET screen.

» VOICE » VOICE > REC/SET > SET

2. Touch [TX LEVEL]. 2. Touch the item to set. (Example: Auto Monitor)

3. Touch the option to set. (Example: OFF)

3. Touch any Voice memory key other than [T4] or
[T8]. ([T1] ~ [T3], [T5] ~ [T7])

4. To close the VOICE TX SET screen, push .

TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching
•• The transceiver automatically transmits. the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on
LLTo adjust the Transmit voice level using [T4] or [T8], the QUICK MENU screen.
reverse steps 2 and 3.
4. While transmitting, rotate to adjust the Auto Monitor (Default: ON)
transmit voice level.
LLPushing [DEF] for 1 second returns the value to the Turns the Automatic Monitor function for recorded
default. audio content transmission, ON or OFF.
LLAdjusting TX LEVEL too high may result in over •• ON: Automatically monitors transmit audio when
modulation and transmit signal distortion. sending recorded audio.
5. To save and close the VOICE TX screen, push •• OFF: Monitors transmit audio only when the Monitor
several times. function is ON.

Repeat Time (Default: 5sec)

Sets the repeat interval to repeat the voice
transmission. The transceiver repeatedly transmits the
recorded content at this interval.
•• Set to between 1 and 15 seconds.

LLRepeatedly transmits the recorded content for up to 10

minutes.
LLAfter 10 minutes have passed, and all of the recorded
content in the memory is transmitted, the transceiver
automatically returns to receive.

5-5
Section 6 MEMORY OPERATION
Memory channels�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6-2
Selecting a Memory group���������������������������������������������������������������������������6-2
Entering Memory channel contents��������������������������������������������������������������6-2
Selecting a Memory channel������������������������������������������������������������������������6-3
DD Selecting with �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6-3
DD Selecting on the MEMORY screen��������������������������������������������������������������������6-3
Selecting a Call channel�������������������������������������������������������������������������������6-3
Copying the Memory channel contents��������������������������������������������������������6-4
DD Copying to the VFO�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6-4
DD Copying to another Memory channel����������������������������������������������������������������6-4
Entering a Memory group/Memory channel name���������������������������������������6-5
DD Entering a Memory group name������������������������������������������������������������������������6-5
DD Entering a Memory channel name��������������������������������������������������������������������6-5
Clearing a Memory channel�������������������������������������������������������������������������6-6
MEMORY screen������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6-6
Memo Pad����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6-7
DD Saving the contents into a Memo Pad���������������������������������������������������������������6-7
DD Calling up the Memo Pads��������������������������������������������������������������������������������6-7
DD MEMO PAD screen�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6-7

6-1
6 MEMORY OPERATION

Memory channels Entering Memory channel contents

The Memory mode enables you to quickly select often- NOTE: The new content you enter will overwrite any
used frequencies, modes, and other parameters. While content already in the selected memory.
operating in the Memory mode, you can temporarily
change the operating frequency, mode, and so on,
without overwriting the Memory channel contents. 1. Select the VFO mode. (Basic manual)
LLTo save the changed value, overwrite the Memory 2. Set the frequency, operating mode, and other
channel contents, or copy to another Memory channel. parameters.
(p. 6-4) 3. Touch the VFO/MEMORY icon.
Memory 4. Touch [MW].
Group Displayed
channel
00 to 99 00 to 99 Regular Memory channels.
1 frequency, 1 mode, 1 filter,
memory channel name,
tone settings (including tone
frequencies for repeater and tone 5. Touch “Write to a New Channel.”
squelch), and select memory
scan setting in each memory
channel.
LLUp to 500 channels can be
separately stored in the 100
memory channel groups.
CALL CH 144 C1/C2 Call channels with split frequency
430 C1/C2 capability each band.
1200 C1/C2 LLThey cannot be left blank.
2400 C1/C2 6. Touch the desired Memory channel. (Example: 00)
5600 C1/C2
10G C1/C2

Selecting a Memory group

1. Touch the VFO/MEMORY icon.

LLTo change a Memory group, touch [GROUP].

7. Touch [YES].

2. Touch [GROUP].

3. Touch a Memory group (00 ~ 99, or CALL CH).

Indicates the listed group. •• The contents are entered in the selected Memory
channel.
TIP: Touching [MW] for 1 second in step 4 enters the
contents to a blank channel in the selected group.

LLYou can toggle the listed group by touching the icon

in the upper left corner of the screen.
•• “ALL GROUPS” is displayed when all groups are
listed.
•• “ACTIVATE GROUPS” is displayed when only the
groups that have one or more channels are listed.

6-2
6 MEMORY OPERATION

Selecting a Memory channel

There are 3 ways to select a Memory channel. DDSelecting on the MEMORY screen
•• Selecting with 1. Select the Memory mode. (Basic manual)
•• Selecting on the MEMORY screen 2. Open the MEMORY GROUP screen.
•• Selecting using the keypad (Basic manual) » MEMORY

3. Touch a Memory group. (Example: 00)

DDSelecting with
1. Select the Memory mode. (Basic manual)
2. Assign the Select Memory Channel function to
. (Basic manual)
3. Rotate until you select the Memory
channel you want to use.

4. Touch the Memory channel that you want to use.

Memory mode
(Example: channel 00 in group 00)

TIP: To sequentially select a channel in a

different group
1. Push .
2. Touch “Channel Select Group Range.”

Selecting a Call channel

1. Select the operating band. (Basic manual)
2. Push to select the Call Channel mode.
3. Rotate to select the Call channel that you
want to use.

3. Touch “All Group.”

Call Channel mode

6-3
6 MEMORY OPERATION

Copying the Memory channel contents

You can copy a Memory channel contents to the VFO DDCopying to another Memory channel
or to another Memory channel. 1. Select the Memory mode. (Basic manual)
2. Assign the Select Memory Channel function to
. (Basic manual)
DDCopying to the VFO
3. Rotate to select the channel to be copied.
1. Select the Memory mode. (Basic manual) (Example: channel 01 in group 00)
2. Assign the Select Memory Channel function to 4. Open the MEMORY GROUP screen.
. (Basic manual) » MEMORY
3. Rotate to select the channel to be copied.
(Example: channel 01 in group 00) 5. Touch a Memory group. (Example: 00)
4. Touch the VFO/MEMORY icon.
5. Touch [M→VFO] for 1 second.

6. Touch of the channel that you want to write the

copied contents to. (Example: channel 04)

•• A beep sounds, and the selected Memory cannel

contents are copied to the VFO.
6. Touch [VFO] to select the VFO mode.

•• DO NOT rotate . Select the channel by

rotating .
7. Touch “Memory Write.”

8. Touch [YES].

•• A beep sounds, and the selected Memory cannel

contents are copied.
9. To close the MEMORY screen, push .

6-4
6 MEMORY OPERATION

Entering a Memory group/Memory channel name

You can assign a name of up to 16 characters to DDEntering a Memory channel name
each Memory group (00 ~ 99) and to each Memory 1. Open the MEMORY GROUP screen.
channel. » MEMORY

2. Touch the Memory group that contains the desired

DDEntering a Memory group name memory channel. (Example: 01)
1. Open the MEMORY GROUP screen.
» MEMORY

2. Touch the Memory group that you want to assign

a name to, for 1 second. (Example: 01)

3. Touch of the channel that you want to assign a

name to. (Example: channel 01)

3. Touch “Edit Name.”

4. Touch “Edit Name.”

4. Enter a group name, then touch [ENT].

5. Enter a name, then touch [ENT].

6. To close the MEMORY screen, push several

times.

5. To close the MEMORY GROUP screen, push

. Memory channel
name
LLThe Memory channel name is not displayed when the
Mini Scope screen or expanded screen is displayed.
LLYou can also select not to display the Memory name
on the standby screen.
» SET > Display > Memory Name

6-5
6 MEMORY OPERATION

Clearing a Memory channel MEMORY screen

You can clear a no-longer-used Memory channel » MEMORY > Group 00 ~ 99, CALL CH
and reset it as a blank channel, except for the Call
channels (C1 and C2). You can edit Memory channel contents on the
MEMORY screen.
1. Select the Memory mode. (Basic manual)
2. Assign the Select Memory Channel function to 1 2 3 4
. (Basic manual)
3. Rotate to select the channel to be 7
cleared. (Example: channel 01 in group 01) 6
4. Touch the VFO/MEMORY icon.

5. Touch [M-CLR] for 1 second. 5

1 Group number and Group name

Displays the Memory group number (00 ~ 99) and
name, if entered.
2 Frequency
Displays the entered frequency.
3 Operating mode
Displays the selected operating mode.
4 Memory menu
Touch to display the MEMORY MENU screen.
LLYou can select “Edit Name,” “Memory Write,” or
“Memory Clear.”
5 Memory channel name
Displays the memory channel name, if entered.
LLSee page 6-5 for details.
6 Memory select icon (00 ~ 99)
zzTouch this icon to set the Select number “★1,”
“★2,” “★3,” or OFF.
LLSee page 7-8 for the Select Memory scan.
zzTouch the icon for 1 second to display the
SELECT ALL CLEAR screen, and then select the
desired item to reset the Select number.
7 Memory channel number
Displays the Memory channel number (00 ~ 99, C1,
C2).
LLC1 and C2 cannot be left blank.

TIP: About the QUICK MENU screen

While selecting a Memory channel with memory
contents, push to open the QUICK MENU
screen. You can select SELECT, Edit Name, Memory
Write, Memory Copy, Insert Channel, Move Channel,
Memory Clear, Delete Channel, or SELECT All Clear.

6-6
6 MEMORY OPERATION

Memo Pad
There are 5 Memo Pads as the default to save DDMEMO PAD screen
frequencies and operating modes for easy writing and The MEMO PAD screen displays the saved contents
recall. You can increase the Memo Pads to 10 in the in a list, in which you can select or delete the saved
following item. contents.
» SET > Function > Memo Pad Quantity » MPAD
LLThe Memo Pads are separate from Memory channels.

Memo Pads are convenient when you want to

temporarily memorize a frequency and operating
mode, such as when you find a DX station in a pile-
up, or when the desired station is busy for a long time
and you want to temporarily look for other stations. Temporary Pad

DDSaving the contents into a Memo Pad

1. Select the VFO mode. (Basic manual) TIP: If you change the frequency or operating
2. Set the frequency and operating mode, then push mode called up from Memo Pads, the contents are
for 1 second. automatically updated in a temporary Pad.
•• A beep sounds.
LLWhen you save up to the set number of Memo Pads Key Action
in “Memo Pad Quantity,” the oldest Memo Pad is ▲/▼ Scrolls through the list.
automatically cleared for the new Memo Pad.
Touch for
NOTE: Each Memo Pad must have its own unique DEL Deletes the selected Memo Pad.
1 second
contents. The Memo Pads with identical content Touch for
cannot be saved. DEL ALL Deletes all the Memo Pads.
1 second
Select to display the MEMO PAD list in the
EXPAND
Expanded or Normal screen.
DDCalling up the Memo Pads
1. Select the VFO mode. (Basic manual)
2. Push several times until the desired Pad is
displayed.
LLPushing selects the Memo Pads.
LLThe most recently saved Memo Pad is selected first.

6-7
Section 7 SCANS
Scan types����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-2
Preparation���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-2
DD Squelch status���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-2
SCAN screen������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-3
SCAN SET screen����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-4
Programmed scan and Fine Programmed scan�������������������������������������������7-5
DD Programmed scan operation�����������������������������������������������������������������������������7-5
Entering Scan Edges������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-6
Memory scan������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-7
DD Memory scan operation�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-7
Select Memory scan�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-8
DD Setting the Select Memory channels�����������������������������������������������������������������7-8
DD Select Memory scan operation��������������������������������������������������������������������������7-8
Mode Select scan�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-9
DD Mode Select scan operation������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-9
∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan���������������������������������������������������������������������������7-9
DD ∂F scan operation���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7-9
Temporary Skip function�����������������������������������������������������������������������������7-10

7-1
7 SCANS

Scan types Preparation

VFO SCAN DDSquelch status
Used to detect signals by automatically changing the
frequency of the VFO mode.
The scan works with the selected band’s squelch
status. Be sure to adjust the squelch level according
Programmed scan (p. 7-5) to your operating environment.
Repeatedly scans the Program Scan Edge ranges. LLNormally, set the squelch level to the point where the
The Edge frequencies are programmable. (p. 7-6) noise just disappears and the RX indicator goes OFF.
Fine Programmed scan
If the squelch opens while scanning, the tuning When the scan starts with the squelch open:
step changes to 10 Hz. This reduces the scan •• When the tuning step is 1 kHz or less, the scan
speed, but the transceiver keeps scanning.
continues until it is manually stopped— it does not
MEMORY SCAN pause, even if signals are detected.
Used to detect signals by automatically scanning the •• When the tuning step is 5 kHz or more, the scan
memories in the Memory mode. pauses on each step when the Scan Resume
Memory scan (p. 7-7) function is ON. It does not pause when the function
Repeatedly scans all entered Memory channels or is OFF.
Memory channels in the selected group.
Select Memory scan (p. 7-8) When the scan starts with the squelch closed:
Repeatedly scans Select Memory channels. The scan stops when a signal is detected, regardless
Mode Select scan (p. 7-9) of the tuning step.
Repeatedly scans Memory channels with the same LLWhen the Scan Resume function is ON, the scan pauses
operating mode. for 10 seconds after detecting a signal, then resumes 2
seconds after the signal disappears.
∂F SCAN (p. 7-9)
Repeatedly scans within the ∂F span area.
The scan starts from the center frequency.
Fine ∂F scan
If the squelch opens while ∂F scanning, the tuning
step changes to 10 Hz. This reduces the scan speed,
but the transceiver keeps scanning.

7-2
7 SCANS

SCAN screen
Display the SCAN screen. zz Push to display the SCAN SELECT screen.
» SCAN LLIf you push while scanning, the scan is
canceled.
zz Hold down for 1 second to start the
previously selected scan.

VFO mode

Memory mode

Key Action
Starts or cancels a Programmed
Touch
scan.
PROG
Touch for Displays the SCAN SELECT
1 second screen.
Touch Starts or cancels a Memory scan.
MEMO Touch for Displays the SCAN SELECT
1 second screen.
∂F Starts or cancels a ∂F scan.
While Programmed scanning, touch to switch
to the Fine Programmed scan.
While ∂F scanning, touch to switch to the
FINE
Fine ∂F scan.
LLIn the Memory mode, this key is displayed
when a ∂F scan is started.
Selects a Memory channel (except
C1 and C2) to set as a Select
Touch
Memory channel.
SELECT •• “★1,” “★2,” “★3,” or “(no icon)”
Touch for Displays the SELECT ALL CLEAR
1 second screen.
Selects the Select scan number for the
SEL No. Select Memory scan.
•• “★1,” “★2,” “★3,” or “★1,2,3”
Selects a ∂F span.
∂F SPAN •• ±5.0 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz, ±100
kHz, ±500 kHz, or ±1 MHz
SET Displays the SCAN SET screen.
Sets the operating frequency to
Touch for
RECALL the frequency displayed on this
1 second
key.

7-3
7 SCANS

SCAN SET screen

You can change the recorder settings on this screen. Pause Timer (Default: 10sec)
When Scan Resume is ON, selects the Scan Pause
1. Display the SCAN screen. Timer. When a signal is received, the scan pauses for
» SCAN this set period of time.
•• 2 ~ 20sec: When a signal is received, the scan
2. Touch [SET].
pauses for 2 ~ 20 seconds (in 2 second
steps).
•• HOLD: The scan pauses until the signal
disappears.

Resume Timer (Default: 2sec)

3. Touch the item to set. (Example: SCAN Speed) Selects the scan Resume Timer. When a received
signal disappears, the scan resumes after this set
period of time passed.
•• 0sec: The scan resumes immediately after the
signal disappears.
•• 1 ~ 5sec: The scan resumes 1 ~ 5 seconds after
the signal disappears.
•• HOLD: The scan remains paused for the
Pause Timer setting, even if the signal
4. Touch the option to set. (Example: Slow) disappears.

Temporary Skip Timer (Default: 5min)

Selects the effective time of the Temporary Skip
function.
LLThis timer is activated for the VFO scan, Memory scan,
and DR scan.
•• 5min/10min/15min:
5. To close the SCAN SET screen, push . The Temporary Skip channels are
skipped for the set period of time.
•• While Scanning:
TIP: You can set each item to its default by touching The Temporary Skip channels are
the item for 1 second, and then touching “Default” on skipped until the scan is stopped.
the QUICK MENU screen. •• While Powered ON:
The Temporary Skip channels are skipped
until the transceiver is turned OFF.

MAIN DIAL Operation (SCAN) (Default: Up/Down)

Selects the function of while scanning.
SCAN Speed (Default: Fast) •• OFF: Rotating stops the scan.
Sets the desired scan speed to slow or fast. •• Up/Down: Rotating changes the scanning direction.
•• Slow:Scan speed is slow.
•• Fast: Scan speed is fast. Program Scan Edge
You can delete, copy, or edit the lower and higher
SCAN Resume (Default: ON) frequencies for programmed scans.
Sets the Scan Resume function to ON or OFF. The transceiver has a total of up to 25 frequency
•• OFF: When a signal is detected, cancels the scan. ranges (00 ~ 24), and you can set the scan name,
•• ON: When a signal is detected, the scan pauses mode, and the IF filter for each Scan Edge.
LLThe default setting may differ, depending on the
for 10 seconds, then resumes.
transceiver version.
Two seconds after the signal disappears, the LLSee page 7-6 for entering Scan Edges.
scan resumes.

7-4
7 SCANS

Programmed scan and Fine Programmed scan

Repeatedly scans the Program Scan Edge ranges. DDProgrammed scan operation
1. Select the VFO mode.
Scan
2. Select the operating mode and tuning step.
(Example: USB, 1 kHz)
Lower
Jump
Higher 3. Display the SCAN screen.
frequency frequency » SCAN

4. Touch [PROG] for 1 second.

LLTo change the upper and lower frequency, see page
7-6 for details.
LLIf the same frequencies are entered into the upper and
lower frequency, the Programmed scan does not start.
LLThe Fine Programmed scan is most effective in the
SSB, CW, and RTTY modes.

5. Touch the frequency range to scan.

(Example: P00)

Blinks
Blinks

•• The Programmed scan starts.

LLWhen a signal is detected, the scan pauses
according to the “SCAN Resume” setting, and then
resumes.
LLYou can change the tuning step by touching kHz.
LLTo cancel the scan, touch [PROG].
6. To switch to the Fine Programmed scan, touch
[FINE].

Blinks

•• The tuning step changes to 50 Hz steps.

LLWhen a signal is detected, the tuning step changes to
10 Hz steps.
LLTo return to the Programmed scan, touch [FINE]
again.
7. To close the SCAN screen, push .

7-5
7 SCANS

Entering Scan Edges

You can enter the upper and lower frequency edges 7. Touch “FREQUENCY.”
to the Program Scan Edge ranges for Program scans. 8. Enter the upper and lower edge frequency, then
Each Program Scan Edge range has its own name, touch [ENT].
mode, and IF filter settings. Entry example: [1] [4] [4] [ENT] [1] [4] [6] [ENT]
You can enter a total of up to 25 Program Scan Edge
ranges.
LLThe default settings may differ, depending on the
transceiver version.

1. Display the SCAN SET screen.

» SCAN > SET

2. Touch “Program Scan Edge.”

LLTouch to select the upper and lower edge
frequency, and then rotate or touch the
keypad to edit the frequency.
9. Touch “MODE.”
10. Touch the mode to be used during a scan.
(Example: FM)

3. Touch the Scan Edge range that you want to

enter, for 1 second. (Example: 00)

LLWhen you select “---,” the mode set in the VFO mode
is used during a scan.
LLWhen you select “DD,” you cannot select “FIL.”
11. Touch “FIL.”
4. Touch “Edit.” 12. Touch the IF filter number to be used during a
scan. (Example: FIL 1)

5. Touch “NAME.”

13. Touch “<<Write>>.”

14. Touch [YES].

6. Enter a name, then touch [ENT].

•• A beep sounds, and the Program Scan Edge range is

entered.
•• Returns to the PROGRAM SCAN EDGE screen.
7-6
7 SCANS

Memory scan
Repeatedly scans all entered Memory channels DDMemory scan operation
(except C1 and C2). 1. Select the Memory mode.
Blank (not entered) Memory channels are skipped. 2. Display the SCAN screen.
» SCAN
Ch 00 Ch 01 Ch 02 Ch 03
3. Touch [MEMO] for 1 second.
Ch 99 Blank channels are skipped� Ch 04

Ch 98 Ch 50 Ch 06 Ch 05

LLIf two or more Memory channels are not entered, the

Memory scan does not start.
4. Touch “ALL MEMORY SCAN.”

Blinks

•• The All Memory scan starts.

LLWhen a signal is detected, the scan pauses
according to the “SCAN Resume” setting, and then
resumes.
LLTo cancel the scan, touch [MEMO].
5. To close the SCAN screen, push .

TIP: Touch GROUP 00 ~ 99 in step 4 to scan

through the Memory channels in the selected group.
(Example: GROUP 00)
LLIf two or more Memory channels are not entered in the
selected group, the scan does not start.

7-7
7 SCANS

Select Memory scan

Repeatedly scans Select Memory channels (★1, ★2, DDSelect Memory scan operation
★3). 1. Select the Memory mode.
Ch 00 Ch 01 Ch 02 Ch 03
2. Display the SCAN screen.
★1 ★2 ★1 ★1 » SCAN
Ch 99 “★1,” “★2,” and “★3” show that the channel Ch 04 3. Touch [MEMO] for 1 second.
★1 is specified as a Select Memory� ★1
Ch 98 Ch 50 Ch 06 Ch 05
★1 ★3 ★2 ★1

LLIf two or more Memory channels are not designated as

Select Memory channels, the Select Memory scan does
not start.

4. Touch the Select Memory channel number.

DDSetting the Select Memory channels (Example: ★1)
1. Select the Memory mode.
2. Display the SCAN screen.
» SCAN

3. Rotate to select memory channels to set

as Select Memory channels.
4. Touch [SELECT] to set the selected number.
LLEach touch selects “★1,” “★2,” “★3,” or “(no icon).”

Blinks
Selected
number

•• The Select Memory scan starts.

LLInformation
•• When a signal is detected, the scan pauses
according to the “SCAN Resume” setting, and then
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set more than two Select resumes.
Memory channels. •• To return to the regular Memory scan, touch
[SELECT].
TIP: Setting Select Memory channels on the •• While scanning, touch [SEL No.] to select the Select
MEMORY screen. Memory scan number.
1. Display the MEMORY screen. •• To cancel the scan, touch [MEMO].
» MEMORY > Group 00 ~ 99 5. To close the SCAN screen, push .
2. Touch the SELECT icon to set the channel as a
Select Memory channel. (Example: ★1) Clearing all Select Memory channels
LLEach touch selects “★1,” “★2,” “★3,” or “(no icon).” 1. Touch [SELECT] for 1 second on the SCAN
screen.
•• The SELECT ALL CLEAR screen is displayed.
2. Touch the Select Memory channel number to
clear.

7-8
7 SCANS

Mode Select scan ∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan

Repeatedly scans Memory channels (except C1 and Repeatedly scans within the ∂F span area. The scan
C2) that are set to the mode selected before starting starts from the center frequency.
the scan.
146�17 MHz 146�18 MHz 146�19 MHz
Ch 00 Ch 01 Ch 02 Ch 03 Scan Scan
FM AM FM FM
Start
Only Memory channels set to Jump
Ch 99 Ch 04
FM the FM mode are scanned� FM
Scan edge Center Scan edge
Ch 98 Ch 50 Ch 06 Ch 05
FM DV AM FM  (Example: Span: ±10 kHz)
LLIn a Fine scan (Programmed or ∂F), the scan speed
decreases when the squelch opens, but the transceiver
DDMode Select scan operation keeps scanning. The scan tuning step changes to 10 Hz
1. Select the Memory mode. when the squelch opens.
2. Set the operating mode.
3. Display the SCAN screen.
» SCAN
DD∂F scan operation
1. Set the center frequency.
4. Touch [MEMO] for 1 second. 2. Set the operating mode and tuning step.
(Example: FM, 1 kHz)
LLYou can also change these settings while scanning.
3. Display the SCAN screen.
» SCAN

4. Touch [∂F SPAN] several times to select the span.

5. Touch “MODE SELECT SCAN.”

•• Each touch changes the span.

5. Touch [∂F].

Blinks
Blinks

•• The Mode Select scan starts.

LLWhen a signal is detected, the scan pauses •• The ∂F scan starts.
according to the “SCAN Resume” setting, and then LLWhen a signal is detected, the scan pauses according
resumes. to the “SCAN Resume” setting, and then resumes.
LLTo cancel the scan, touch [MEMO]. LLTo turn the TS function to scan by the frequency step
6. To close the SCAN screen, push . setting, touch the 100 kHz digit on the frequency readout.
LLTo cancel the scan, touch [∂F] again.
6. To switch to the Fine ∂F scan, touch [FINE].

Blinks

•• The scan frequency step changes to 50 Hz.

LLTo return to the ∂F scan, touch [FINE] again.
7. To close the SCAN screen, push .
7-9
7 SCANS

Temporary Skip function

This function temporarily skips unwanted frequencies
(or memory channels) during a scan for the set
period of time or condition, without changing the Skip
Channel setting.
LLYou can also use this function during a DR scan.
(p. 11-4)

1. Start a scan.
•• When a signal is detected, the scan pauses.
2. Push .
3. Touch “Temporary Skip Set.”

•• Scan resumes.

TIP:
•• Up to 20 Temporary Skip frequencies or Memory
channels can be set. When the 21st frequency or
Memory channel is set, the oldest setting is
automatically deleted.

•• The Temporary Skip function is canceled when the

Temporary Skip Timer (Default: 5 min) has passed, or
when touching “Temporary Skip Cancel” in the QUICK
MENU screen.

7-10
Section 8 OTHER FUNCTIONS
About “USB SEND/Keying”��������������������������������������������������������������������������8-2
Protection function����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-2
Measuring SWR�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-3
DD Spot measurement��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-3
DD Plot measurement���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-4
NTP function�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-5
DD Manually synchronizing the internal clock���������������������������������������������������������8-5
DD Using the NTP function�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-5
REF adjustment��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-6
Screen Capture function�������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-7
DD Setting the Screen Capture function�����������������������������������������������������������������8-7
DD Capturing a screen��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-7
DD Viewing the captured screen�����������������������������������������������������������������������������8-7
Entering DTMF code������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-8
Transmitting the DTMF code������������������������������������������������������������������������8-8
DD Transmitting a DTMF code��������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-8
DD Transmitting a DTMF code (Direct Input)����������������������������������������������������������8-8
DD Selecting the DTMF transmit speed������������������������������������������������������������������8-9
Home Channel function��������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-9
DD Home Channel setting���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-9
DD Home CH Beep function������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-9
PRESET menu�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8-10
DD Loading the preset memory�����������������������������������������������������������������������������8-10
DD Editing the memory contents���������������������������������������������������������������������������8-10
Share Pictures function������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-11

8-1
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

About “USB SEND/Keying” Protection function

You can control transmit, receive, and CW/RTTY The transceiver has a 2 step protection function to
keying from the PC through the USB port. protect the final power amplifiers in case the antenna
Select the control port to be used for communication SWR becomes high.
between the transceiver and PC in “USB SEND,” The function detects the power amplifier temperature
“USB Keying (CW),” and “USB Keying (RTTY)” and activates when the temperature becomes too
according to your operating needs. high.
» SET > Connectors > USB SEND/Keying
Power down transmission
Reduces the transmission output power.
The IC-905 has two virtual COM ports, A and B. •• “LMT” is displayed while transmitting.
The transmit and receive control (USB SEND), CW
Keying, or RTTY (FSK) Keying signals from the PC are TX inhibit
assigned to the DTR/RTS terminals in the virtual port. Disables the transmitter.
LLWhen connecting to a USB port on your PC that is •• (Grayed out) is displayed instead of while the
installed the USB driver, USB (A) and USB (B) are named transmitter is disabled.
IC-905 Serial Port A (CI-V)” and “IC-905 Serial Port B.”

NOTE: If the function is activated, wait until the

USB SEND (Default: OFF) power amplifier cools down by using the transceiver
USB Keying (CW) (Default: OFF) only to receive.
USB Keying (RTTY) (Default: OFF) •• You can check the power amplifier temperature with the
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function. TEMP gauge in the Multi-function meter.
•• USB (A) DTR: Uses the DTR terminal on USB (A).
•• USB (A) RTS: Uses the RTS terminal on USB (A).
•• USB (B) DTR: Uses the DTR terminal on USB (B).
•• USB (B) RTS: Uses the RTS terminal on USB (B).

CPU TXD IC-905

Serial Port A
RXD
Virtual (CI-V)
USB SEND
RTS COM
port A
DTR

USB Keying TXD

(CW)
RXD [USB] port
Virtual
RTS COM IC-905
USB Keying port B
DTR Serial Port B
(RTTY)

TIP: About the “USB SEND/Keying” items

•• When you operate RTTY or CW through your PC’s USB
port and your IC-905, you may not be able to send the
“SEND” or “Keying” signals until a few seconds after
you connect the USB cable.
•• When you operate through your PC’s USB port and the
IC-905, and connect a second transceiver to another PC
USB port, a short “SEND” or “Keying” signal will be sent
from the first transceiver. Therefore, we recommend that
you do not connect a second transceiver to a USB port
of the same PC. Or, always turn OFF the transceiver
power before you connect a USB cable.

8-2
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Measuring SWR
The transceiver has an SWR meter. There are 2 ways DDSpot measurement
to measure SWR. One way is a spot measurement, 1. Turn OFF any connected antenna tuner.
and the other is a plot measurement. LLPerform this step if an antenna tuner is connected,
LLWhen you measure the SWR of an antenna itself, turn and you want to measure the SWR of the antenna
OFF any connected antenna tuner. itself.
LLIn the 10 GHz band, you cannot measure the SWR.
2. Set the desired frequency band and a frequency
in the portion of the band that you use the most.
3. Select the RTTY mode.
4. Set the RF power.
5. Touch the TX meter several times until the SWR
meter is displayed.

“SWR” is displayed.

NOTE: Before transmitting, monitor the

operating frequency to make sure you will not
cause interference to other stations on the same
frequency.

6. Hold down [PTT] to transmit, and then read the

SWR on the meter.

The best match is within this range.

(1.5 or less)

LLIf the SWR meter indicates 1.5 or less, the antenna is

matched.
LLIf the SWR is a high value, adjust your antenna.
7. Release [PTT] to stop transmitting.

8-3
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Measuring SWR

DDPlot measurement
You can measure the SWR over the entire set 8. Release [PTT] to stop transmitting.
frequency range. LLWhen using a straight key or paddle, stop keying.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to measure the SWR over
1. Set the desired frequency band. the entire frequency range.
2. Set the RF power.
3. Display the SWR GRAPH screen.
» SWR

4. Set the center frequency for the SWR to measure. The best match is
(Example: 145.000.00) within this range.
The center frequency is displayed (1.5 or less)
5. Touch [STEP] several times to set the measuring
after the measurement
step, or touch [BAR] several times to set the
number of graph bars.
TIP:
•• Rotate to move the frequency marker “▲” to
the current transmit frequency.
•• “<<” (low) or “>>” (high) is displayed when the
transmitted frequency is out of the displayed range.
•• Touch [RECALL] for 1 second to move the frequency
Measuring step marker “▲” back to the center frequency.
•• Touch the bar graph to delete the measured SWR.
Number of
graph bars
Center frequency

LLYou can select between 10, 50, 100, and 500 kHz
measuring steps.
LLYou can select between 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, and 13 graph
bars.
6. Touch to start measuring.
•• Displays the frequency marker “▲” and the
measurement frequency.
NOTE: Before transmitting, monitor the
operating frequency to make sure you will not
cause interference to other stations on the same
frequency.

7. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.

•• The bar graph displays the SWR.
LLWhen the Break-in function is ON in the CW mode,
you can use a straight key or paddle to transmit.

Measurement
frequency

Frequency marker
Measuring SWR

8-4
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

NTP function
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) function DDUsing the NTP function
synchronizes the internal clock of the IC-905 with a By turning ON the NTP function, the transceiver
time management server. automatically synchronizes the internal clock with the
LLTo use this function, an Internet connection and default
time management server.
gateway settings are necessary.
LLThis function is set to ON by default.

DDManually synchronizing the internal 1. Open the DATE/TIME screen.

» SET > Time Set > Date/Time
clock
Using this function, you can manually synchronize 2. Touch “NTP Function.”
the internal clock by accessing a time management
server.

1. Open the DATE/TIME screen.

» SET > Time Set > Date/Time

2. Touch “<<NTP TIME SYNC>>.”

3. Select ON or OFF.
•• When ON is selected, the transceiver starts
accessing the NTP server address that is set in “NTP
Server Address.”
4. To close the DATE/TIME screen, push
several times.
•• “NTP Time Sync. Please wait...” is displayed.
•• The transceiver starts accessing the NTP server
address that is set in “NTP Server Address.”
3. When “Time Sync completed.” is displayed, touch
[OK].
4. To close the DATE/TIME screen, push
several times.

8-5
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

REF adjustment
The IC-905 automatically adjusts the internal LLInformation
reference frequency using the received GPS data as •• To synchronize to GPS again, touch [Sync to GPS] in
the default setting. Step 3.
LLThe IC-905 automatically adjusts the internal reference •• While synchronizing, “REF Adjust (Synchronizing to
frequency, regardless of the “Position Input” setting. GPS)” is displayed, and you cannot manually adjust the
internal reference frequency.
NOTE: The transceiver has been adjusted and
tested at the factory before being shipped. You
should not have to manually recalibrate it.

To manually adjust the internal reference frequency:

1. Display the “REF Adjust” screen.
» SET > Function > REF Adjust

2. Touch [Cancel Sync]. •• The GPS synchronization is not automatically canceled,

even if you turn OFF the transceiver, then turn it ON
again.

NOTE: Sudden changes of temperature, for

example, when you turn ON the transceiver, or start
transmission, may cause the transceiver to take a
longer time to synchronize.

3. Touch [YES].

4. Adjust the internal reference frequency.

5. To close the REF Adjust screen, push
several times.

8-6
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Screen Capture function

You can capture the transceiver display onto an SD DDViewing the captured screen
card. Most of the screens used in this manual are 1. Open the SCREEN CAPTURE VIEW screen.
captured using this function. » SET > SD Card > Screen Capture View
However, some displays cannot be captured.
•• The capture list is displayed.
NOTE: To use the Screen Capture function, an SD
•• The latest screen capture is at the top of the list.
card (user supplied) is required.
2. Touch the desired screen capture to display it.

DDSetting the Screen Capture function

1. Open the “Screen Capture [POWER] Switch”
screen.
» SET > Function >
Screen Capture [POWER] Switch
2. Touch “ON.”
•• The screen capture is displayed.
LLWhile a screen capture is displayed, you can scroll
DDCapturing a screen through all the screen captures by rotating .
1. Display the desired screen to capture.
2. Push to capture the screen. Checking the file information and deleting a file
•• The captured screen is saved onto the card.
1. Touch the screen capture that you want to view
LLWhen “Screen OFF [POWER] Switch” is set to
ON, the dialog to select “Screen OFF” or “Screen or delete for 1 second.
Capture” is displayed.

2. Touch an item from “File Information,” “Delete,”

and “Delete All.”

•• File Information: D
 isplays the file name, size,
and date of the selected screen
capture.
•• Delete: Deletes the selected file.
•• Delete All: Deletes all files.

8-7
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Entering DTMF code Transmitting the DTMF code

The transceiver can save up to 16 memories of 24 DDTransmitting a DTMF code
digit DTMF code. 1. Display the DTMF screen.
» DTMF
1. Display the DTMF screen.
» DTMF 2. Touch [SEND].
2. Touch [EDIT].

3. Touch the DTMF code you want to transmit.

(Example: d0)

3. Touch the DTMF channel where you want to save

a DTMF code. (Example: d0)

•• Transmits the selected DTMF code.

4. To close the DTMF screen, push .

DDTransmitting a DTMF code (Direct Input)

1. Display the DTMF screen.
4. Enter a DTMF code, then touch [ENT]. » DTMF
(Example: 123456A) 2. Touch [SEND].

3. Touch “Direct Input.”

5. To close the DTMF MEMORY screen, push .

4. Enter a DTMF code, then touch [TX].

(Example: 012345#)

•• Transmits the entered DTMF code.

5. To close the DTMF screen, push .

8-8
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Transmitting the DTMF code Home Channel function

DDSelecting the DTMF transmit speed Home Channels are often-used frequencies you can
1. Display the DTMF screen. be preset in the transceiver’s VFO mode, Memory
» DTMF mode, and DR screen.

2. Touch [SET].
DDHome Channel setting
Example: In the VFO mode
1. Select a mode (VFO or Memory) or the DR screen
in which you want to set the Home Channel.
2. Select a frequency, channel, or a repeater to be
set as the Home Channel.
LLOn the DR screen, select “FROM.”
3. Push .
4. Touch “Home CH Set.”
3. Touch “DTMF Speed.”

5. Touch “Set Frequency.”

4. Touch the option to set. (Example: 300ms)

LLIn the Memory mode, touch “Set Channel.” On the

•• 100ms: Transmits the DTMF tones at about 100 DR screen, touch “Set Repeater.”
milliseconds per code (5 characters per TIP: Touching “Clear” in Step 5 clears the Home
second).
Channel setting.
•• 200ms: Transmits the DTMF tones at about 200
milliseconds per code (2.5 characters per
second).
•• 300ms: Transmits the DTMF tones at about 300
milliseconds per code (1.6 characters per
second).
•• 500ms: Transmits the DTMF tones at about 500
milliseconds per code (1 character per
second).
5. To close the DTMF SET screen, push .
DDHome CH Beep function
When the set Home Channel is selected, a beep
sounds. You can confirm the Home Channel selection
without looking at the display.
LLYou can turn OFF the Home CH Beep function.
» SET > Function > Home CH Beep

8-9
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

PRESET menu
You can save the combination of the following settings DDEditing the memory contents
for the data mode to quickly change the settings,
depending on your operating needs. NOTE: You cannot edit the preset memory that is in
use. To edit it, first touch [UNLOAD], and then edit
Preset Name SSB-D TX Bandwidth the memory.
Mode DATA OFF MOD
Filter COMP
1. On the PRESET screen, touch a preset memory
Filter BW SSB TBW to edit for 1 second.
Filter Type SSB TX Bandwidth •• Opens the QUICK MENU screen.
USB/AV-OUT Output Select USB SEND 2. Touch “Edit the Preset Memory.”
LLWhen touching “Save to the Preset Memory,” all of
USB/AV-OUT AF Output Level USB Keying (CW) the contents are set to the current settings before
USB/AV-OUT AF SQL USB Keying (RTTY) editing.
USB/AV-OUT IF Output Level CI-V Address 3. Touch the check box to select whether or not to
load the item.
USB MOD Level CI-V Transceive
•• “✓” is displayed on the left side of the loading item.
DATA MOD CI-V USB Echo Back 4. Touch the item name, and then touch the option
LLThe transceiver has a total of 5 memories. to set.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit the preset memory.
6. Touch “<<Write>>.”
DDLoading the preset memory 7. Touch [YES].
1. Push .
2. Touch 2 at the center bottom of the screen. TIP: Depending on your software, you may need to
3. Touch [PRESET]. change the “CI-V Address” setting.
For example, you use a software that is not
compatible with the IC-905. In that case, you may be
able to use the software by setting “CI-V Address” to
another transceiver’s address.

4. Touch the preset memory to load.

5. Touch [YES].
•• The selected preset memory is loaded, and “In Use”
is displayed on the PRESET screen. If you change
the transceiver settings, and they do not match the
contents of the preset memory, “In Use” disappears.
LLTouching [UNLOAD] returns the transceiver settings
to those set before loading the preset memory.

NOTE:
•• You can load a memory whose mode is set to “DD”
or “ATV” only when the 1200 MHz or higher band is
selected.
•• You cannot load the preset memory whose “Mode” is
checked while:
- Transmitting in the DV mode.
- The DR function is ON.
- The DV Gateway function is ON.
- Selecting a blank Memory channel in the Memory
mode.
•• You cannot load a preset memory that is displayed as
“(BLANK).”

8-10
8 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Share Pictures function

With this function, you can send a picture and view a
received picture, even if you do not use the software
application.
LLSee “About the Share Pictures function” that can be
downloaded from the Icom website.

8-11
Section 9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)
GPS TX mode and TX format types�������������������������������������������������������������9-2
Differences between older models���������������������������������������������������������������9-2
When a received signal contains position data��������������������������������������������9-3
Checking your location���������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-3
DD Displaying Position Data�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-3
DD GPS POSITION screens and their meanings���������������������������������������������������9-4
DD About the RX screen�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-5
DD About the Course����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-6
DD About the Grid Locator��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-6
DD Changing the GPS Memory or Alarm����������������������������������������������������������������9-6
DD Changing the Compass Direction����������������������������������������������������������������������9-7
DD Saving your own or a received station’s position����������������������������������������������9-7
Checking GPS information (Sky view screen)����������������������������������������������9-8
Transmitting D-PRS data������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-9
DD D-PRS���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-9
DD Operating in the D-PRS mode���������������������������������������������������������������������������9-9
DD Displayed items�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-10
DD Setting D-PRS Position (Mobile/Base)������������������������������������������������������������9-11
DD Setting D-PRS Object/Item������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-12
DD Setting D-PRS Weather����������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-13
DD Weather station transmission��������������������������������������������������������������������������9-13
DD Confirming the weather data input������������������������������������������������������������������9-14
DD Application setting�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-14
DD About the weather data content����������������������������������������������������������������������9-14
DD Displaying your location using mapping software�������������������������������������������9-15
Transmitting NMEA data�����������������������������������������������������������������������������9-17
DD Setting the GPS data sentence�����������������������������������������������������������������������9-17
DD Setting a GPS message����������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-18
GPS Automatic Transmission���������������������������������������������������������������������9-18
GPS Memory����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-19
DD Adding a GPS Memory������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-19
DD Entering the GPS Memory group name����������������������������������������������������������9-21
DD Deleting GPS Memory�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-22
DD Rearranging the display order of the GPS data����������������������������������������������9-23
GPS Alarm��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-24
DD Setting the GPS Alarm function to All Memories (all GPS Memories)�������������9-25
DD Setting the GPS Alarm function to RX (a caller station)����������������������������������9-26
GPS SET����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9-27

9-1
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS TX mode and TX format types

GPS position data has 2 TX modes, D-PRS and Example: When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS
NMEA. Moreover, the D-PRS mode data, 5 position Position (Mobile)
formats, Position (Mobile station/Base station), Object, » GPS > GPS Position
Item, and Weather, are selectable.

D-PRS D-PRS is a function that simultaneously sends position data received from the internal
GPS receiver, using the slow speed data packet space, along with voice.

Position (Mobile) A station operating from a vehicle, or other position, away from its normal base position.

Position (Base) A station operating at home or in a building.

Object Transmitting Object data such as earthquake information, satellite tracking information,
and so on.
An Object contains a time stamp.

Item Transmitting Item data such as a traffic accident, lighthouse, antenna, or DV access point
position, and so on.
An Item does not contain a time stamp.

Weather A station transmitting weather information received from a weather device.

NMEA A station transmitting position data (NMEA0183) received from the internal GPS receiver.

Differences between older models

 (As of March 2023)
•• The GPS TX mode, “GPS (DV-G)” and “GPS-A (DV-A),” are now called “NMEA (DV-G)” and “D-PRS (DVA).”
GPS (DV-G) → NMEA (DV-G)
GPS-A (DV-A) → D-PRS (DV-A)
•• For users who have one of the following models:
ID-800H, IC-91AD/E91, IC-U82, IC-V82, IC-7100, ID-51A/E, ID-31A/E, IC-9100, IC-80AD/E80D, ID-880H/E880,
IC-92AD/E92D, IC-2820H/E2820
When you receive a D-PRS position (Base), Object, Item, or Weather information, their data is not displayed.
•• Only the ID-52A/E, ID-51A/E PLUS, ID-51A/E PLUS2, ID-31A/E PLUS, ID-5100A/E, ID-4100A/E, IC-R30,
IC-9700, IC-705, and IC-905 can receive Power, Height, Gain, and Directivity data.
•• For users who have one of the following models:
IC-9100, IC-80AD, IC-E80D, ID-880H, ID-E880, IC-92AD, ICE92D, IC-U82, IC-V82
If you transmit with the Altitude setting ON, the character string is included in a comment on the transceivers that
cannot display altitude.
•• Set GSV sentence to OFF when sending a GPS message to conventional digital transceivers (IC-2820H,
IC-E2820, ID-800H, IC- 91AD, IC-E91, IC-V82, IC-U82, IC-2200H). The GSV sentence is incompatible with them.
They will not display GPS messages properly if sent as a GSV sentence from the IC-905.

9-2
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

When a received signal Checking your location

contains position data
You can check your current location.
When a received signal contains position data, the This section is described using received position data.
LLThe screens are just examples.
caller’s position data is displayed in the RX position
screen.
Refer to the right for details. DDDisplaying Position Data
Example: W
 hen the signal from JG3LUK contains 1. Push in the standby mode.
position data. 2. Touch “GPS Position.”
•• Opens the GPS POSITION screen.
3. Rotate .
•• Changes between the MY (My position), RX
(Received position), MEM (GPS Memory position), or
ALM (GPS Alarm position) screen.

When you receive the signal, the RX

position data is displayed in the RX
position window.

After a few seconds, the window disappears. The displayed icon depends on the type of screen
(MY, RX, MEM, or ALM).

4. To close the GPS POSITION screen, push .

NOTE: Latitude, longitude, and altitude data may

differ, depending on your received GPS signal.

RX position icon TIP:

•• If you transmit with the GPS POSITION screen open,
the screen closes. To check the location, push ,
When the received signal contains position and then touch “GPS Position” while transmitting.
data, the RX position icon is displayed, as •• On the MY screen or RX screen, you can enter the
shown above. displayed position information in a GPS Memory by
LLIf you touch the RX position icon, the RX pushing and touching “GPS Memory.”
position window is displayed again. •• See page 9-19 about the GPS Memory function and
see page 9-24 about the GPS Alarm function for more
details.
LLYou can turn OFF the caller’s position data display.
» SET > Display > RX Position Display
LLYou can turn OFF the RX position icon indication.
» SET > Display > RX Position Indicator

9-3
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking your location

DDGPS POSITION screens and their meanings

LLInformation Example for the GPS POSITION screens:
•• Pushing to change the compass direction.
GPS Memory:
(p. 9-7)
Tokyo Skytree
•• About the Course (p. 9-6)
•• About the Grid Locator (p. 9-6)
251 mi
GPS Alarm:
248 mi Tokyo Big Sight
454 ft Caller station
(D-PRS: mobile)
Your station Course: 95 degrees
Speed: 2.3 mph

MY screen (Your position information) MEM screen (GPS Memory’s information)

When “Position Input” is set to “Manual,” the compass
heading and course direction are not displayed.
(p. 9-27)

Your course heading is North. Direction from your location

Latitude
Longitude
Grid Locator
Altitude Distance from your location
Speed
Received time

*
Course direction

RX screen (Callerʼs position information) ALM screen (GPS Alarm’s information)

Depending on the callerʼs GPS TX Mode and TX
format, the displayed itemʼs meanings may differ, and
some data may not be displayed. (p. 9-5)
Direction from your location
Example: The caller stationʼs GPS TX Mode is
“D-PRS,” and its TX format is “Position
(Mobile).”
SSID
Distance from your location
Direction from your location D-PRS symbol

*
Caller’s Course
direction
Distance from Caller’s speed
your location * When a name is not entered in the GPS Memory
channel, date and time are displayed instead of
the name. In the QUICK MENU screen, you can
Caller’s call sign Time the caller acquired change the GPS Memory or GPS Alarm in the GPS
with SSID the position data POSITION screen. (p. 9-6)

9-4
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking your location

DDAbout the RX screen

TX format:
D-PRS

Moving symbol Base station

symbol

For a mobile station, Course and For a base station, Output power, Antenna height,
Speed are displayed. Antenna gain, and Antenna direction are displayed.

Time that the caller sent the Object’s data. LLFor an Item station, Time is not displayed.

Time that the caller acquired the weather data.

LLCall sign is displayed with an SSID.
LLWhen the Object or Item is disabled, “KILLED” is displayed.

TX format:
NMEA

LLA symbol or SSID is not displayed when the TX format is NMEA.

9-5
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking your location

DDAbout the Course DDChanging the GPS Memory or Alarm

The course displayed on the GPS POSITION screens You can change the GPS Memory or GPS Alarm in
is indicated in degrees. the GPS POSITION screen.
0°
1. While selecting the MEM screen or ALM screen,
315° N 45° push .
2. Touch “GPS Memory Select,” or touch “Alarm
Select.”
270° W E 90° MEM screen

225° S 135°

180°

DDAbout the Grid Locator ALM screen

Grid Locator (GL) is a position compressed into a 6
character code, calculated by the longitude and the
latitude position of the station.
The locator is simply calculated by dividing the earth’s
surface into squares.
It is used to find the location of a transceiver station.

3. Select the GPS Memory or GPS Alarm to display

on the GPS POSITION screen.
LLAdding or editing a GPS Memory: p. 9-19
LLSetting the GPS Alarm: p. 9-24

Field

PM74SO
Square Subsquare

The grid locator map of Japan

140°
44 54 64 74 84 94 04 14 24

PN
43

QN
53 63 73 83 93 03 13 23
42 52 62 72 82 92 02 12 22
41 51 61 71 81 91 01 11 21
40 50
49 59
60 70 80 90 00 10 20 40°
69 79 89 99 09 19 29
48 58 68 78 88 98 08 18 28
47

PM
57 67 77 87 97 07 17 27
46 56 66 76

QM
86 96 06 16 26
45 55 65 75 85 95 05 15 25
44 54 64 74 84 94 04 14 24
43 53 63 73 83 93 03 13 23
42 52 62 72 82 92 02 12 22
41 51 61 71 81 91 01 11 21

9-6
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking your location

DDChanging the Compass Direction DDSaving your own or a received station’s

You can set the compass direction to Heading Up, position
North Up, or South Up. You can save the position of your station or the
position of the caller station.
1. While displaying the GPS POSITION screen, The transceiver has a total of 300 GPS memories, and
push . the memories can be assigned into one of 27 banks, A
2. Touch “Compass Direction.” ~ Z, and (No Group).

1. Select the screen that you want to save.

LLTo save your own position: MY screen
LLTo save a received position: RX screen
2. Push .
3. Touch “Add To GPS Memory.”

3. Select the compass direction.

LLSee pages 9-19 ~ 9-21 for entering details.

4. Touch “<<Add Write>>.”

Heading Up North Up South Up

The top is always The top is The top is

your course always north. always south. LLTo select the destination group to be saved, touch
direction. “GROUP.”
5. Touch [YES].
•• Saves the data in the GPS Memory, then returns to
the GPS POSITION screen.
6. To close the GPS POSITION screen, push .

TIP: The position is saved in the selected group in

the GPS MEMORY EDIT screen. (Step 4)

9-7
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Checking GPS information (Sky view screen)

This screen is used to view GPS satellite information when the GPS icon does not stop blinking for a long time.
The GPS Information displays the quantity, signal power, and position of the GPS satellites.
The sky view screen displays the position of GPS satellites. The screen also displays each satellite’s direction,
elevation angle, satellite numbers, and their receiving signal strength status.

1. Push . Signal strength graph

2. Touch “GPS Information.”

Sky view Tracking satellite

screen quantity

About the display

•• : Untracking satellite.
•• : Tracking satellite with a weak signal, shown Untracking satellite
by the satellite number. Satellite number 26’s
•• : Tracking satellite with a strong signal, shown signal is strong.
by the satellite number.
•• SAT: The quantity of tracking satellites. Elevation angle
•• Altitude: The altitude of your station. The altitude is 0 degree line
only displayed when 4 or more satellites
Elevation angle
are tracked. When 3 or less satellites are
30 degree line
tracked, “------ft” is displayed.
•• Longitude/Latitude: Satellite
Elevation angle
Longitude and Latitude of your station. number 24’s
60 degree line
signal is weak.
•• Signal strength graph:
Signal strength of the satellites Elevation angle
: Untracking satellite 90 degree line (Zenith)
: Tracking satellite with a weak signal
: Tracking satellite with a strong signal

3. To close the GPS INFORMATION screen, push The image of satellite number 24
. Elevation angle
90 degree line (Zenith) Elevation angle
60 degree line
Elevation angle
E 30 degree line
N
Elevation angle
0 degree line
Satellite
number 24

S
W

9-8
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

When D-PRS is selected as the GPS TX mode, you NOTE:
can transmit D-PRS data. When operating in the • If “Position Input” is set to “Manual,” the manually
D-PRS mode, the following codes are transmitted to entered position data in “Manual Position” is changed to
the PC. D-PRS code is based on APRS® code. the D-PRS data format to transmit.
(APRS®: Automatic Packet Reporting System) » GPS > GPS Set > Position Input
• Note that if “GPS Auto TX” is set to any other setting
D D-PRS than “OFF,” the data is transmitted according to the set
time�
D-STAR Packet Reporting System (D-PRS) is a mode » GPS > GPS Auto TX
that simultaneously sends position data received from
the internal GPS receiver, using the slow speed data
packet space, along with voice audio in the DV mode.
In the Analog mode, you can transmit or receive only
voice audio or data at one time. However, a D-PRS
capable radio can transmit or receive message data
or GPS position data at the same time voice is being
transmitted or received. An I-GATE is required to send
position data to the APRS server.

The image of D-PRS

<Using a Repeater>

D-STAR Repeater
Voice, Messages, and
D-PRS positions D-PRS positions
APRS server

Information from
an APRS network

Voice, Messages, and

D-PRS positions
D-PRS
positions
PC

JA3YUA-Z

<Simplex>
INTERNET

You can check the

Voice, Messages, and position on a map site!
D-PRS positions
D-PRS positions
Voice, Messages, and
D-PRS positions
I-GATE

D Operating in the D-PRS mode TIP: In the D-PRS mode, you can transmit
To transmit D-PRS data, follow the steps below. For earthquake or weather information, in addition to
more details, see the pages listed along with the position data�
steps� » GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > TX Format

1� Enter “MY” (Your own call sign). (p. 10-4)

TX format of D-PRS
2� Confirm the GPS signal receiving.
• Position (Mobile/Base):
3� Set GPS TX mode to “D-PRS.” (p. 9-27) Used to transmit position data.
4� Set TX information� • Object: Used to transmit specific position data.
L You must set “SSID” and “Symbol.” (Contains a time stamp.)
» GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS • Item: Used to transmit specific position data.
(Does not contain a time stamp.)
 • Weather: Used to transmit weather information.
Complete! You can transmit in the D-PRS mode.

9-9
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

DDDisplayed items
Depending on the TX format, the setting items and displayed order of the items differ.

D-PRS
Position Object Item

Data extension: Power/Height/Gain/Directivity

Data extension: Power/Height/Gain/Directivity

Data extension: Course/Speed

Data extension: Course/Speed

Data extension: OFF

Data extension: OFF

Weather
Mobile

Base

Unproto Address ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Comment ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Altitude ✓ ✓
Object Name/
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Item Name
Data Type ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Position information
(Latitude/Longitude/ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Altitude)
Data Extension ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Course ✓ ✓
Speed ✓ ✓
Power ✓ ✓ ✓
Height ✓ ✓ ✓
Gain ✓ ✓ ✓
Directivity ✓ ✓ ✓
Symbol ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SSID ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Time stamp ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓: Displayed

9-10
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

DDSetting D-PRS Position (Mobile/Base)

Set to transmit as a D-PRS Position (Mobile/Base).
LLSee page 9-27 for details.

1. Setting the GPS TX Mode to D-PRS 8. Setting the Altitude

» GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS Set whether or not to transmit the altitude data
acquired from the GPS receiver. (p. 9-29)

2. Checking the Unproto Address NOTE: If you transmit with the altitude setting ON,
You should use the default address, and editing is not the character string is included in a comment on the
recommended. products that cannot display the altitude. (p. 9-29)

3. Setting the TX format to “Position”

Set “TX Format” to “Position.” 9. Setting the Data Extension
Set the data extension of your station’s information.
LLSet “Data Extension” to “Course/Speed” to transmit as a
4. Selecting the Symbol mobile station.
Select the Symbol that indicates your operating LLSet “Data Extension” to “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity” to
situation. transmit as a base station.
LLSee page 9-28 to directly enter the Symbol.
When you set “Data Extension” to “Power/
Height/Gain/Directivity”:
5. Selecting the SSID
9-1. Setting the TX power
To assist in identifying your station’s type, select the
APRS® (Automatic Packet Reporting System) based Select the TX power level of the base station, to
SSID after the D-PRS data call sign. (p. 9-28) transmit along with the position data.
9-2. Setting the antenna height
6. Entering a comment Select the height of the base station’s antenna, to
Enter a comment, and transmit it with the D-PRS transmit along with the position data.
position data. 9-3. Setting the antenna gain
LLThe number of characters you can enter differs, depending
on the data extension and altitude settings. (p. 9-29)
Select the gain of the base station’s antenna, to
transmit along with the position data.
1. Touch “Comment.” 9-4. Setting the antenna directivity
2. Push . Select the direction the base station’s antenna was
3. Touch “Edit.” pointing, to transmit along with the position data.
4. Enter a comment.
5. After entering, touch [ENT].
6. Push . 10. Exiting the POSITION screen
To close the POSITION screen, push several
7. Setting the Time Stamp times.
•• Returns to the standby screen, and then is
Set the Time Stamp function to transmit the received
displayed.
time data in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
(p. 9-29)

9-11
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

DDSetting D-PRS Object/Item

Set to transmit as a D-PRS Object or Item.
LLSee page 9-30 for details.

1. Setting the GPS TX Mode to D-PRS 9. Setting the Data Extension

» GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS Set the data extension of an Object or Item’s
information.
LLSet “Data Extension” to “Course/Speed” to transmit as a
2. Checking the Unproto Address mobile station.
LLSet “Data Extension” to “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity” to
You should use the default address, and editing is not transmit as a base station.
recommended.
When you set “Data Extension” to “Course/
3. Setting the TX format to “Object” or “Item” Speed”:
Set “TX Format” to “Object” or “Item.” 9-1. Entering the Course
Enter the Object or Item’s course when the station
4. Entering Object name or Item name moves.
Enter an Object or Item name, such as an event 9-2. Entering the Speed
information or location. Enter the Object or Item’s speed.

5. Setting Data type When you set “Data Extension” to “Power/

Set the Object or Item’s status. Height/Gain/Directivity”:
LLFor example, if you want to transmit finished event 9-3. Selecting the TX power
information as an Object, set the Date type to “Killed
Object.”
Select the TX power level of the Object or Item if
the station is a repeater, node, access point, and so
on, and an antenna is installed.
6. Selecting the Symbol
9-4. Selecting the antenna height
Select the Symbol that indicates an Object or Item.
LLSee page 9-28 to directly enter the Symbol. Select the height of the Object or Item’s antenna.
9-5. Selecting the antenna gain
7. Entering a comment Select the gain of the Object or Item antenna.
Enter a comment to transmit as an Object or Item. 9-6. Selecting the antenna direction
LLThe number of characters you can enter differs, depending
Select the direction the base Object or Item’s
on the data extension and altitude settings. (p. 9-30)
antenna is pointing.
1. Touch “Comment.”
2. Push . 10. Selecting the SSID
3. Touch “Edit.” To assist in identifying your station’s type, select the
4. Enter a comment. APRS® (Automatic Packet Reporting System) based
5. After entering, touch [ENT]. SSID after the D-PRS data call sign. (p. 9-28)
6. Push .
11. Setting the Time Stamp
8. Entering the Position data LLThis item is displayed when the TX format is “Object.”
Enter the position data of an Object or Item. Set the Time Stamp function to transmit the received
LLFor example, if you want to transmit traffic accident time data in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
information as an Item, enter the position data where the (p. 9-31)
accident happened.
If the position data is in the GPS memory, you can easily
set the position data from the memory. 12. Exiting the OBJECT or ITEM screen
To close the OBJECT or ITEM screen, push
several times.
•• Returns to the standby screen, and then is
displayed.
9-12
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

DDSetting D-PRS Weather DDWeather station transmission

Set to transmit as a D-PRS Weather station. When you transmit as a weather station, you should
LLSee page 9-33 for details. set the weather station’s settings, and input the
weather data into the [USB] port. You can input the
1. Setting the GPS TX Mode to D-PRS weather data from a third party’s weather device by
» GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS converting it to the APRS weather format in your PC
or microcomputer.

2. Checking the Unproto Address After completing the weather station’s settings, and
You should use the default address, and editing is not inputting the weather data, you can transmit as a
recommended. weather station.

3. Setting the TX format to “Weather” NOTE: To input the Weather data into the [USB]
port, set “USB (B) Function” to “Weather.”
Set “TX Format” to “Weather.” » SET > Connectors > USB (B) Function >
USB (B) Function
4. Setting the Symbol
If the weather data is not input into the [USB] port,
Select the Symbol that indicates the weather station. you cannot transmit as a weather station.
LLSee page 9-28 to directly enter the Symbol.

5. Selecting the SSID PC

To assist in identifying your station’s type, select the

APRS® (Automatic Packet Reporting System) based
SSID after the D-PRS data call sign. (p. 9-28)
or

6. Entering a comment Microcomputer

Enter a comment to transmit as a D-PRS Weather Weather device
station.

1. Touch “Comment.” USB cable

2. Push . (User supplied)
3. Touch “Edit.”
4. Enter a comment.
5. After entering, touch [ENT]. To the [USB] port
6. Push .

7. Setting the Time Stamp

Set the Time Stamp function to transmit the received
time data in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
(p. 9-33)

8. Exiting the WEATHER screen

To close the WEATHER screen, push several
times.
•• Returns to the standby screen, and then is
displayed.

9-13
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

DDConfirming the weather data input DDAbout the weather data content
You can confirm whether or not weather data is input The weather data should be input according to the
into the [USB] port. format (based on the APRS® Weather Data), shown
below.
1. Set “GPS TX Mode” to “D-PRS,” and “TX format”
to “Weather.” (p. 9-27) Example:
2. On the standby screen, push . 220/004 g005 t077 r000 p000 P000 h50 b09900 End code
3. Touch “Weather Information.” 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
•• Displays the WEATHER INFORMATION screen as
shown below, if weather data is input into the [USB] No. Item Value Unit
port.
1 Wind direction 000 to 360 º
LLWhen weather information is displayed, you can
transmit as a weather station. If “-” is displayed on the 2 Wind speed 000 to 999 mph
screen, weather data is not input into the [USB] port. 3 Gust speed g000 to g999 mph
In that case, check the input data settings.
Temperature t-99 to t-01, ºF
4
t000 to t999
5 Rainfall r000 to r999*1 inch
6 Rainfall (24 Hours) p000 to p999*1 inch
7 Rainfall (Midnight) P000 to P999*1 inch
Humidity h00, h01 to h99 %
8
(h00 indicates 100%.)
Barometric pressure b00000 to b99999*2 hPa,
9
mb
DDApplication setting
Configure the communication software as follows. *1 The last two digits indicate the one decimal place and the
•• Port: The COM port number that is used by two decimal place.
the IC-905.* *2 The last digit indicates the one decimal place.
•• Baud rate: Your desired speed
•• Data: 8 bit LLIf you have no data, enter a space or “.” (period)
•• Parity: none instead of a number.
•• Start: 1 bit (Example: “.../...g...t077r000p...P...h50b.....”)
•• Stop: 1 bit LLEnter <CR>, <LF>, or <CR><LF> for an end code.
•• Flow control: none
* Depending on the PC environment, the COM port number
used by the IC-905 may be higher than 5. In that case, use
an application that can set it to higher than 5.

9-14
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

DDDisplaying your location using mapping software

If you transmit to an I-GATE station, and then enter the call sign You can check it on the Internet!
information on the Internet map website, the selected symbol is
displayed. PC Smartphone

Example: Check your location on the APRS.fi site. Enter your call sign,
and then click <Search>.
1. Display a free APRS® related map site on the
Internet. (Example: http://aprs.fi/ )
2. Enter your call sign in the “Track callsign” field.
3. Click <Search>.
•• The icon (D-PRS symbol) is displayed on the map
site.

← Your symbol and your call sign

9-15
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting D-PRS data

TIP:
D-PRS data content
D-PRS data content are shown below�

DPosition (Mobile)
(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API905,DSTAR*:/002338h3437�38N/13534�29E>090/002/A=000012IC-905 OP�SATOH
1 2 3 4 7 8 10 11 13 14
9 9
DPosition (Base)

(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API905,DSTAR*:/002338h3437�38N/13534�29E-PHG5132OP�SATOH
1 2 3 4 7 8 10 12 14
9 9
DObject

(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API905,DSTAR*:;HAM FESTA*012345z3437�38N\13534�29Eh2023�02�28 am10-pm4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 14
9 9
DItem

(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API905,DSTAR*:)REPEATER!3454�00N/13536�00ErPHG5132439�39MHｚDV RPT JP3YHH A

1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14
9 9

DWeather

(e�g�) JA3YUA-A>API905,DSTAR*:/012345z3454�00N/13536�00E_220/004g005t077r000p000P000h50b09900
1 2 3 4 7 8 10 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
9 9

12Data Extension(PHG codes)

1Call sign
PHG codes definitions
2SSID
3Unproto Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4D-PRS Data type First: Power 0 1 4 9 16 25 36 49 64 81 (W)
/ Position with time stamp Second: Height 10 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 2560 5120 (feet)
! Position without time stamp
Third: Gain 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (dB)
; Object
Fourth: Directivity omni 45°NE 90°E 135°SE 180°S 225°SW 270°W 315°NW 360°N − −
) Item
5Object Name/Item Name
6Data Type 13Altitude 19Rainfall (24 Hours)
* Live Object −99999 ~ 999999 feet 0�00 ~ 9�99 inch
! Live Item 14Comment 20Rainfall (Midnight)
_ Killed Object/Killed Item 15Wind direction/Wind speed 0�00 ~ 9�99 inch
7Time Stamp (UTC) Wind direction:0 ~ 360° 21Humidity
h Hour Minute Second Wind speed: 0 ~ 999 mph 1 ~ 99%, 00=100%
z Day Hour Minute 16Gust speed 22Barometric pressure
8Latitude 0 ~ 999 mph 0�0 ~ 9999�9 hPa
9Symbol 17Temperature
10Longitude −99 ~ 999ƒ
11Data Extension (Course/Speed) 18Rainfall
Course:0 ~ 360° 0�00 ~ 9�99 inch
Speed:0 ~ 999 knots

9-16
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting NMEA data

Set a GPS sentence to transmit GPS data in the DV NOTE:
mode. •• Set “GSV Sentence” to “OFF” when sending the GPS
message to conventional digital transceivers. (p. 9-2)
•• If “Position Input” is set to “Manual,” the transceiver
DDSetting the GPS data sentence automatically sets the NMEA sentence, and transmits
1. Open the NMEA SET screen. it along with the manually entered position data in
» GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA “Manual Position.”
» GPS > GPS Set > Position Input
2. Touch “GPS Sentence.”
» GPS > GPS Set > Manual Position
•• Note that if “GPS Auto TX” is set to any other option
than “OFF,” data is automatically transmitted according
to the set time.
» GPS > GPS Auto TX
LLIf “Position Input” is set to “Manual,” the GPS
Automatic Transmission function is not activated.

3. Select the GPS sentence.

•• Displays “✓” when the sentence is set to ON.

LLThe selectable GPS sentences are RMC, GGA, GLL,
VTG, GSA, and GSV. The GGA sentence is set to
ON as the default GPS sentence.
LLTo reset to the default setting, push , and then
touch “Default.”
4. Repeat step 3 to set the GPS sentence.
LLUp to 4 GPS sentences can be set at a time.
5. To close the “GPS Sentence” screen, push
several times.
•• Returns to the standby screen, then is
displayed.

Contents of GPS sentence

Lon Date 2D COG SOG
Sentence Alt UTC Status Others
/Lat (UTC) /3D (True) (knot)
RMC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Magnetic variation, Mode Indicator
Number of satellites in use, HDOP,
GGA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Geoidal separation, Age of Differential
GPS data, Differential reference station ID
GLL ✔ ✔ ✔ Mode Indicator
COG (Magnetic north), SOG (km/h),
VTG ✔ ✔
Mode Indicator
PRN number of satellites used in
GSA ✔ ✔
solution, PDOP, HDOP, VDOP
Total number of sentences, Sentence
number, Total number of satellites in
GSV
view, Satellite information (ID, Elevation,
Azimuth, S/N)

9-17
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Transmitting NMEA data GPS Automatic Transmission

DDSetting a GPS message NOTE:
Enter a GPS message to be transmitted with the •• Use the GPS Automatic Transmission function in only
position data. the Simplex mode.
•• Using the function through a Repeater may interfere
with other communications.
Example: Entering “Japan TOM”

1. Open the NMEA SET screen. You can set the GPS Automatic Transmission function
» GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA in the following menu.
2. Touch “GPS Message.” » GPS > GPS Auto TX

If you set this function, GPS data is automatically

transmitted according to the set time.
LLThis function is not activated if your call sign (MY) is not
entered in the transceiver.
LLIf “GPS TX Mode” is set to “NMEA” and “Position Input” is
set to “Manual,” this function is not activated.
» GPS > GPS Set > Position Input
3. Touch [EDIT].

4. Enter a GPS message of up to 20 characters.

5. After entering, touch [ENT].

6. To close the “GPS Message” screen, push

several times.

9-18
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory
You can add GPS data to GPS Memory. You can add GPS Memory Group names are just
your own position, other station’s position, or any example.
positions that are manually entered. (No Group)

You can save up to 300 GPS memories, and A: ICOM Icom Osaka HC
conveniently saved in up to 27 groups, from A ~ Z and
“(No Group).” The A to Z groups can also be named. Icom America

B: HAM festa Tokyo Big Sight

C: Railroad Dayton Hamventio

Friedrichshafen

Z:

DDAdding a GPS Memory

Example: Add “HOME” into (No Group).

1. Adding a GPS Memory and entering the edit mode 3. Entering the GPS Memory date
1. Open the GPS MEMORY screen. 1. Touch “DATE.”
» GPS > GPS MEMORY 2. Touch a digit to enter.
3. Touch [+] and [–].
2. Touch “(No Group).” LLSet to between 2000/01/02 and 2099/12/30.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the date.

3. Push .
4. Touch “Add.” 5. After entering, push .
•• Opens the GPS MEMORY EDIT screen.
TIP: To edit the previously saved GPS Memory, 4. Entering the GPS Memory time
touch “Edit” in step 4. You can enter the content in
the same way as described above. 1. Touch “TIME.”
2. Touch a digit to enter.
3. Touch [+] and [–].
LLSet to between 00:00:00 and 23:59:59.
2. Entering a GPS Memory name 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the time.
1. Touch “NAME.”
2. Enter a GPS Memory name of up to 16
characters. (Example: HOME)
3. After entering, touch [ENT].

5. After entering, push .

9-19
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory

DD Adding a GPS Memory

5. Entering the GPS Memory latitude 7. Entering the GPS Memory altitude
1. Touch “LATITUDE.” 1. Touch “ALTITUDE.”
2. Touch a digit to enter. 2. Touch [+/–] to set to plus or minus.
3. Enter the latitude. 3. Enter the altitude.
LLSet to between 0°00.00′ to 90°00.00′.
LLYou can change the unit.
» SET > Display > Display Unit >
Latitude/Longitude
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the latitude.

LLSet to between –32808 and +32808 feet.

4. After entering, touch [ENT].

8. Selecting a GPS Memory group

1. Touch “GROUP.”
5. Touch [N/S] to set to a north latitude (N) or a south
2. Touch the group between (No Group) and A ~ Z.
latitude (S).
6. After entering, touch [ENT].

6. Entering the GPS Memory longitude

1. Touch “LONGITUDE.”
2. Touch a digit to enter.
3. Enter the longitude.
LLSet to between 0°00.00′ to 180°00.00′.
LLYou can change the unit. LLYou can save up to 300 Memories in each group.
» SET > Display > Display Unit >
Latitude/Longitude
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the longitude.

5. Touch [E/W] to set to an east longitude (E) or a

west longitude (W).
6. After entering, touch [ENT].

9-20
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory

DD Adding a GPS Memory DDEntering the GPS Memory group name

9. Writing the GPS Memory You can enter a name for each GPS Memory group.
1. Touch “<<Add Write>>.”
1. Open the GPS MEMORY screen.
» GPS > GPS MEMORY

2. Touch the group that the name to be entered for 1

second.

LLIf you edit a previously added GPS Memory, touch

“<<Overwrite>>.”
2. Touch [YES].
•• The data is added to the GPS memory, then returns
3. Touch “Edit Name.”
the selected GPS Memory group screen.
3. To close the GPS Memory group screen, push
several times..

TIP:
To view the entered content:
Touch the GPS Memory. Rotate to check
the whole content.
4. Enter a group name of up to 16 characters.
5. After entering, touch [ENT].

To cancel the entered data:

While entering or editing the GPS Memory, push 6. To close the GPS MEMORY screen, push
to display the confirmation dialog. several times.
Touch [YES] to cancel entering, then returns to the
GPS Memory group screen.

9-21
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory

DDDeleting GPS Memory

You can delete the GPS Memories. TIP: Deleting a specific GPS Memory
There are 2 ways to delete the Memories: You can delete a specific GPS Memory.
•• Deletes all GPS Memory in a group. 1. Touch the GPS Memory to delete.
•• Deletes a specific GPS Memory. 2. Touch “Delete.”

NOTE: Deleted GPS Memories cannot be restored.

Example: Deleting all in Group E.

1. Open the GPS MEMORY screen.

» GPS > GPS MEMORY

2. Touch the group where the GPS Memory to delete 3. Touch [YES].
is saved for 1 second. •• The selected GPS Memory is deleted.

3. Touch “Delete All In Group.”

4. Touch [YES].
•• All GPS Memory in the selected group are deleted,
then returns to the GPS MEMORY screen.
LLWhen selecting a blank group, “Blank” is displayed.
5. To close the GPS MEMORY screen, push
several times.

9-22
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Memory

DDRearranging the display order of the GPS data

You can move the entered GPS Memories to
rearrange their display order in the selected GPS
Memory group.
LLTo move the GPS Memory out of their assigned Memory
group, select the Memory group in the GPS MEMORY
EDIT screen, and then save.

1. Open the GPS MEMORY screen. 5. Touch the position to insert the Memory you want
» GPS > GPS MEMORY to move.
•• The selected Memory is inserted above the
2. Touch the group where the GPS Memory you destination Memory name.
want to move is saved. LLIf you select “<<Move End>>,” the Memory is moved
to the bottom of the group.

3. Touch the GPS Memory to move for 1 second.

4. Touch “Move.” 6. To close the GPS MEMORY screen, push

several times.

•• While moving, “DESTINATION” blinks.

9-23
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Alarm
The transceiver can sound a GPS Alarm when a target station or position comes into the alarm area. This function
can be set to a caller station, all GPS Memories, a selected GPS Memory group, or a selected GPS Memory.

Alarm Area (Group) (Setting plural stations)

When “All Memories” or a GPS Memory group is selected:

N
Point A 0�25′ 0�25′

0�25′

Your location
0�25′

Point B

Point C
Sounds 3 beeps�

Alarm Area (RX/Memory) (Setting specific station)

When a specific GPS Memory is selected:

Extended range N
approximately 1 km, 1094 Y

Limited range
approximately 500 m, 547 Y

Your location

Target
station

Sounds a beep� Sounds 3 beeps�

9-24
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Alarm

DDSetting the GPS Alarm function to All Memories (all GPS Memories)
1. Open the GPS ALARM screen. LLInformation
» GPS > GPS Alarm •• When either one of the stations in the group enters the
set range, the alarm sounds 3 times.
2. Touch “Alarm Select.” •• When the transceiver sounds a GPS Alarm, “GPS
ALARM” pops up on the screen, and “ ” blinks. See the
illustration below.
•• To cancel the GPS Alarm function, touch “OFF” in step 3
to the left.

Blinks

3. Touch “Group.”

“GPS ALARM” pops up on the screen

and the alarm sounds 3 times.

4. Touch “All Memories.” TIP: When selecting “All Memories,” “No Group,” or
a GPS Memory group (A ~ Z) in step 4 to the left,
you also have to set “Alarm Area (Group)” to use the
GPS Alarm function.
» GPS > GPS Alarm > Alarm Area (Group)

LLIf you want to set the alarm to a specific GPS

Memory group, touch “(No Group)” or “A” to “Z.”
5. To close the GPS ALARM screen, push
several times.

9-25
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS Alarm

DDSetting the GPS Alarm function to RX (a caller station)

1. Open the GPS ALARM screen. LLInformation
» GPS > GPS Alarm •• When a station with its GPS Alarm set enters within an
approximate 1 kilometer (1094 yards) range, the alarm
2. Touch “Alarm Select.” sounds once. When it enters within an approximate 500
meters (547 yards) range, the alarm sounds 3 times.
•• When the transceiver sounds a GPS Alarm, “GPS
ALARM” pops up on the screen, and “ ” blinks. See the
illustration below.
•• To cancel the GPS Alarm function, touch “OFF” in step 3
to the left.

Blinks
3. Touch “RX.”

“GPS ALARM” pops up on the screen

and the alarm sounds 3 times.

NOTE: Even if “RX” is selected in step 3, when the

received signal has no position data, the GPS Alarm
does not sound.

TIP: When selecting “RX” or a specific GPS Memory

in step 3 to the left, you also have to set “Alarm Area
(RX/Memory)” to use the GPS Alarm function.
» GPS > GPS Alarm > Alarm Area (RX/Memory)
LLIf you want to set the alarm to a specific GPS
Memory, touch “Memory” and then select a GPS
Memory in a GPS Memory group.
4. To close the GPS ALARM screen, push
several times.

9-26
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET
NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA transceiver version. The default settings may differ,
depending on your transceiver version. To return to your transceiver version’s default settings, push and
touch “Default.”

» GPS > GPS Set » GPS > GPS Set

Position Input (Default: Internal GPS) Manual Position (Default: LATITUDE: 0°00.00′N,
Selects how to capture position data. LONGITUDE: 0°00.00′W,
•• Internal GPS: Position data of the internal GPS ALTITUDE: ------ft)
receiver is used for the GPS Manually enter the latitude, longitude, and Altitude of
functions. your current position.
•• Manual: Manually enter the current Latitude, LLYou can capture position data from the GPS receiver if
Longitude, and Altitude in “Manual “Capture From GPS” is selected.
Position.”
» GPS
» GPS > GPS Set > GPS Option
GPS TX Mode (Default: OFF)
SBAS (Default: OFF) Selects a GPS transmission mode to send GPS
Turns the SBAS (Satellite Based Augmentation position data while in the DV mode.
System) function ON or OFF. •• OFF: Does not transmit GPS data.
LLWhen turning ON this function, the GPS position •• D-PRS: Transmits GPS data in the D-PRS format.
accuracy can be improved, but the transceiver’s power •• NMEA: Transmits GPS data in the NMEA format.
consumption increases.
•• OFF: Turns OFF the function. » GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS
•• ON: Turns ON the function.
Unproto Address (Default: API905,DSTAR*)
GLONASS (Default: OFF) Displays an unproto address of up to 56 alphanumeric
Selects whether or not to use the data from characters.
the GLONASS (GLObal’naya NAvigatsionnaya NOTE: You should use the default address, and
Sputnikovaya Sistema) satellites. editing is not recommended.
LLWhen turning ON this function, the GPS position
accuracy can be improved, but the transceiver’s power
consumption increases.
•• OFF: Does not use the data from the GLONASS TX Format (Default: Position)
satellites. Selects the format to transmit the position data in the
•• ON: Uses the data from the GLONASS satellites. D-PRS mode.
•• Position: The caller station is the mobile or base
station.
Satellite Information Out
•• Object: Transmits a certain location’s information,
 (Default: GPS/QZSS/GLONASS)
such as an event, earthquake, and so on.
Selects whether or not to output the data from the (The time stamp data is included.)
QZSS (Quasi-Zenith Satellite System) satellites and •• Item: Transmits repeater or antenna information
the GLONASS satellites. that needs no time information.
•• GPS/QZSS/GLONASS: (The time stamp data is not included.)
Outputs the data from the GPS •• Weather: Transmits weather information received
satellites, the QZSS satellites, and the from a weather device.
GLONASS satellites.
•• GPS Only: Outputs the data from only the GPS
satellites.

9-27
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

» GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > SSID (Default: ---)
TX Format > Position Selects an SSID based on APRS to add to your call
®

sign, to show your operating style to other stations.

Symbol (Default: Person) The additional methods of the SSID differ, depending
Selects the symbol that indicates your operating on whether the call sign includes a space or not.
situation. The selected symbol channel’s symbol (1~4) •• ---: The space in call sign is converted to “-.”
is transmitted along with the position data. LLIf no text is entered after the space, the
space will be deleted, and the space is not
converted to “-.”
Editing a symbol
Example: J A3YUA → JA3YUA
1. Touch the symbol channel for 1 second. JA3YUA A → JA3YUA-A
2. Touch “Edit Symbol.” •• (-0): No SSID is added.
3. Push . LLIf a call sign includes a space, any text or
4. Touch “Direct Input.” digit after the space will be deleted.
5. Touch [+]/[−] to edit the first digit. Example: J A3YUA → JA3YUA
6. Touch [+]/[−] to edit the second digit. JA3YUA A → JA3YUA
Selectable characters and symbols •• -1 ~ -15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call sign.
LLExample: SSID is “-9.”
<For the first digit> /, \, 0 to 9, A to Z JA3YUA → JA3YUA-9
<For the second digit> A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! “ # $ % JA3YUA A → JA3YUA-9
&’()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}˜ •• -A ~ -Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call sign.
LLExample: SSID is “-Z.”
7. After editing, touch [SET]. JA3YUA → JA3YUA-Z
•• Sets the Symbol into the channel selected in step 1. JA3YUA A → JA3YUA-Z

Editing a symbol
1. Touch the symbol channel for 1 second. TIP: About the SSID
2. Touch “Edit Symbol.” To assist in identifying a station’s type, designated
3. Touch the symbol. call sign SSIDs are used in D-PRS (or APRS®),
•• Sets the Symbol into the channel selected in step 1. according to a common guideline.
The guideline may be changed when the
infrastructure environment, such as a product
or network, is changed. Please check the latest
guideline in the web site related to D-PRS and
APRS®, and correctly set.
http://aprs.org/aprs11/SSIDs.txt

9-28
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

Comment Data Extension (Default: OFF)

Enter a comment to transmit it with the D-PRS Selects whether or not to transmit the Course/Speed
position data. You can enter up to four comments. data or the Power/Hight/Gain/Directivity data with the
The number of characters you can enter differs, position data in the D-PRS mode.
depending on the Data Extension and Altitude settings. LLThe number of characters you can enter in “Comment” differs,
depending on the “Altitude” and “Data Extension” settings.
Characters •• OFF: Does not transmit any information.
Data Extension Altitude entered •• Course/Speed:
(maximum)
Transmits the course and speed data with the
OFF OFF 43 (Default) position data.
OFF ON 35 LLThe course and speed data are not transmitted
when your location is manually set.
Course/Speed OFF 36
LLWhen transmitting with this setting, your station
Course/Speed ON 28 is regarded as a mobile station.
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity OFF 36 •• Power/Height/Gain/Directivity:
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity ON 28 Transmits the TX power level, height, antenna
gain, and antenna direction, along with the
position data.
The symbol “ ” displays the transmittable comment LLThe Power, Height, Gain, and Directivity data are
range. Please note that the characters that exceed the transmitted even if your location is manually set.
range will not be transmitted. LLWhen transmitting with this setting, your station
is regarded as a base station.

Power (Default: 0W)

Selects the TX power level of the base station, to
transmit along with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• Select 0, 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, or 81 W.

Transmittable comment range display

(Example: up to 28 characters) Height (Default: 10ft)
Selects the height of the base station’s antenna, to
transmit along with the position data.
Time Stamp (Default: OFF) LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
Selects the transmitting time stamp type. “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
The time stamp is transmitted with the position •• Select 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, or
data in the D-PRS mode, and UTC (Universal Time 5120 feet.*
Coordinated) time is used. * If the Altitude/Distance unit is set to “m,” select 3, 6, 12, 24,
LLWhen your position is manually set, time stamp data is 49, 98, 195, 390, 780, or 1561 meters.
not transmitted.
•• OFF: Does not transmit the time information.
Gain (Default: 0dB)
•• DHM: Transmits the time stamp in the Day, Hour,
and Minute format. Selects the gain of the base station’s antenna, to
•• HMS: Transmits the time stamp in the Hour, Minute, transmit along with the position data.
and Second format. LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• Select between 0 and 9 dB.
Altitude (Default: OFF)
Selects whether or not to transmit altitude data with Directivity (Default: Omni)
the position data in the D-PRS mode.
LLThe number of characters you can enter in “Comment” Selects the direction the base station’s antenna was
differs, depending on the “Altitude” and “Data Extension” pointing, to transmit along with the position data.
settings. LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
•• OFF: No altitude data is transmitted. “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• ON: Transmits altitude data with position data. •• Select Omni, 45º NE, 90º E, 135º SE, 180ºS, 225º
SW, 270º W, 315º NW, or 360º N.
9-29
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

» GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > Position (Default: LATITUDE: 0°00.00′N,
TX Format > Object LONGITUDE: 0°00.00′W,
ALTITUDE: ------ft)
Object Name Displays the position information of the Object.
Enter an Object name of up to 9 characters. Push to open the QUICK MENU screen shown
below.
Data Type (Default: Live Object)
Sets the Object’s status.
•• Live Object: The Object is valid.
•• Killed Object: The Object is invalid.

Symbol (Default: Radio)

The symbol is an icon that indicates the Object’s
means of transportation or location. The saved symbol TIP: When you select “Capture From GPS” or “Set
is transmitted along with the position data while in the From GPS Memory,” you can capture the position
D-PRS mode. from the GPS, or set the Object’s position from the
LLSee page 9-28 for details of editing a symbol. GPS memory.

Comment Entering the position information manually

Enter a comment to transmit it with the D-PRS 1. Touch “Edit” on the QUICK MENU screen.
position data. •• The POSITION EDIT screen is displayed.
The number of characters you can enter differs, 2. Touch “LATITUDE.”
depending on the Data Extension and Altitude data entry. 3. Enter a latitude.
LLTouch “N/S” to switch the north latitude and the south
Characters latitude.
Data Extension Altitude entered 4. Touch [ENT].
(maximum)
5. Touch “LONGITUDE.”
OFF — 43 (Default) 6. Enter a longitude.
OFF Entered 35 LLTouch “E/W” to switch the east longitude and the
west longitude.
Course/Speed — 36
7. Touch [ENT].
Course/Speed Entered 28 8. Touch “ALTITUDE.”
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity — 36 9. Enter an altitude.
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity Entered 28 LLAfter entering, touch [+/−] to switch “+” and “−.”
10. Touch [ENT].
11. Touch “<<Write>>.”
The symbol “ ” displays the transmittable comment 12. Touch [YES].
range. Please note that the characters that exceed the •• The position information is entered.
range will not be transmitted.

Transmittable comment range display

(Example: up to 28 characters)

9-30
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

Data Extension (Default: OFF) Directivity (Default: Omni)

Selects whether or not to transmit the Course/Speed Selects the direction the Object’s antenna was
data or the Power/Hight/Gain/Directivity data with the pointing, to transmit along with the position data.
position data in the D-PRS mode. LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
LLThe number of characters you can enter in “Comment” “Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
differs, depending on the “Altitude” and “Data Extension” •• Select Omni, 45º NE, 90º E, 135º SE, 180ºS, 225º
settings. SW, 270º W, 315º NW, or 360º N.
•• OFF: Does not transmit any information.
•• Course/Speed:
SSID (Default: ---)
Transmits the course and speed data with the
position data. Selects an SSID based on APRS® to add to your call
•• Power/Height/Gain/Directivity: sign, to show your operating style to other stations.
Transmits the TX power level, height, antenna The additional methods of the SSID differ, depending
gain, and antenna direction, along with the on whether the call sign includes a space or not.
position data. LLSee page 9-28 for details of the SSID.
•• ---: The space in call sign is converted to “-.”
•• (-0): No SSID is added.
Course (Default: 0º) •• -1 ~ -15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call sign.
Sets the Object’s course to between 0º and 360º. •• -A ~ -Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call sign.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Course/Speed.”
Time Stamp (Default: DHM)
Selects the transmitting time stamp type.
Speed (Default: 0mph) The time stamp is transmitted with the position
Sets the Object’s speed to between 0 and 1150 mph.* data in the D-PRS mode, and UTC (Universal Time
* If the Speed unit is set to “km/h,” set to between 0 to 1850 Coordinated) time is used.
km/h, or set to “knots,” set to between 0 and 999 knots. •• DHM: Transmits the time stamp in the Day, Hour,
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
and Minute format.
“Course/Speed.”
•• HMS: Transmits the time stamp in the Hour, Minute,
and Second format.
Power (Default: 0W)
Selects the TX power level of Object, to transmit along
with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• Select 0, 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, or 81 W.

Height (Default: 10ft)

Selects the height of the Object’s antenna, to transmit
along with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• Select 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, or
5120 feet.*
* If the Altitude/Distance unit is set to “m,” select 3, 6, 12, 24,
49, 98, 195, 390, 780, or 1561 meters.

Gain (Default: 0dB)

Selects the gain of the Object’s antenna, to transmit
along with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
•• Select between 0 and 9 dB.

9-31
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

» GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS > Position (Default: LATITUDE: 0°00.00′N,
TX Format > Item LONGITUDE: 0°00.00′W,
ALTITUDE: ------ft)
Item Name Displays the position information of the Item.
Enter an Item name of up to 9 characters. Push to open the QUICK MENU screen shown
below.
Data Type (Default: Live Item)
Sets the Item’s status.
•• Live Item: The Item is valid.
•• Killed Item: The Item is invalid.

Symbol (Default: Radio)

The symbol is an icon that indicates the Item’s means
of transportation or location. The saved symbol is TIP: When you select “Capture From GPS” or “Set
transmitted along with the position data while in the From GPS Memory,” you can capture the position
D-PRS mode. from the GPS, or set the Item’s position from the
LLSee page 9-28 for details of editing a symbol. GPS memory.

LLSee page 9-30 to enter the position information manually.

Comment
Enter a comment to transmit it with the D-PRS
Data Extension (Default: OFF)
position data.
The number of characters you can enter differs, Selects whether or not to transmit the Course/Speed
depending on the Data Extension and Altitude data data or the Power/Hight/Gain/Directivity data with the
entry. position data in the D-PRS mode.
LLThe number of characters you can enter in “Comment”
Characters differs, depending on the “Altitude” and “Data Extension”
Data Extension Altitude entered settings.
(maximum) •• OFF: Does not transmit any information.
OFF — 43 (Default) •• Course/Speed:
Transmits the course and speed data with the
OFF Entered 35
position data.
Course/Speed — 36 •• Power/Height/Gain/Directivity:
Course/Speed Entered 28 Transmits the TX power level, height, antenna
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity — 36 gain, and antenna direction, along with the
Power/Height/Gain/Directivity Entered 28 position data.

Course (Default: 0º)

The symbol “ ” displays the transmittable comment
range. Please note that the characters that exceed the Sets the Item’s course to between 0º and 360º.
range will not be transmitted. LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Course/Speed.”

Speed (Default: 0mph)

Sets the Item’s speed to between 0 and 1150 mph.*
* If the Speed unit is set to “km/h,” set to between 0 to 1850
km/h, or set to “knots,” set to between 0 and 999 knots.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Course/Speed.”

Transmittable comment range display

(Example: up to 28 characters)

9-32
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

Power (Default: 0W) » GPS > GPS TX Mode > D-PRS >
Selects the TX power level of Item, to transmit along TX Format > Weather
with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to Symbol (Default: WX Station)
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.” The symbol is an icon that indicates the weather
•• Select 0, 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, or 81 W. station’s means of transportation or location.
The saved symbol is transmitted along with the
Height (Default: 10ft) position data while in the D-PRS mode.
LLSee page 9-28 for details of editing a symbol.
Selects the height of the Item’s antenna, to transmit
along with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to SSID (Default: ---)
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
Selects an SSID based on APRS to add to your call
®
•• Select 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, or
sign, to show your operating style to other stations.
5120 feet.*
The additional methods of the SSID differ, depending
* If the Altitude/Distance unit is set to “m,” select 3, 6, 12, 24,
49, 98, 195, 390, 780, or 1561 meters.
on whether the call sign includes a space or not.
LLSee page 9-28 for details of the SSID.
•• ---: The space in call sign is converted to “-.”
Gain (Default: 0dB) •• (-0): No SSID is added.
Selects the gain of the Item’s antenna, to transmit •• -1 ~ -15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call sign.
along with the position data. •• -A ~ -Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call sign.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.”
Comment
•• Select between 0 and 9 dB.
Enter a comment to transmit it with the D-PRS
position data, up to 43 characters.
Directivity (Default: Omni)
Selects the direction the Item’s antenna was pointing,
Time Stamp (Default: DHM)
to transmit along with the position data.
LLThis item is displayed when “Data Extension” is set to Selects the transmitting time stamp type.
“Power/Height/Gain/Directivity.” The time stamp is transmitted with the position
•• Select Omni, 45º NE, 90º E, 135º SE, 180ºS, 225º data in the D-PRS mode, and UTC (Universal Time
SW, 270º W, 315º NW, or 360º N. Coordinated) time is used.
•• OFF: Does not transmit the time information.
•• DHM: Transmits the time stamp in the Day, Hour,
SSID (Default: ---) and Minute format.
Selects an SSID based on APRS to add to your call
®
•• HMS: Transmits the time stamp in the Hour, Minute,
sign, to show your operating style to other stations. and Second format.
The additional methods of the SSID differ, depending
on whether the call sign includes a space or not.
LLSee page 9-28 for details of the SSID.
•• ---: The space in call sign is converted to “-.”
•• (-0): No SSID is added.
•• -1 ~ -15: Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call sign.
•• -A ~ -Z: Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call sign.

9-33
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

» GPS > GPS TX Mode > NMEA GPS Message

Enter a GPS message of up to 20 alphanumeric
GPS Sentence (Default: GGA) characters. (p. 9-18)
Selects sentences to be transmitted in the GPS mode
to transmit position data. The selectable sentences NOTE: When you do not want to send a message,
are RMC, GGA, GLL, VTG, GSA, and GSV. delete the entered message.

NOTE: Set the GSV sentence to OFF when

sending the GPS message to conventional digital » GPS
transceivers. (p. 9-2)
The GSV sentence is incompatible with them. GPS Information
Displays the GPS satellite direction, elevation angle,
satellite number, and receiving status. (p. 9-8)
LLInformation
•• Up to 4 GPS sentences can be set at a time.
•• Displays “✓” when the sentence is set to ON.
•• “VTG,” “GSA,” and “GSV” sentences are not transmitted
when your location has been manually set.

TIP: Contents of GPS sentence

The Time Stamp is displayed based on the UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.

GPS Time
Date COG SOG
Sentence Lon/Lat Alt Stamp Status 2D/3D
(UTC) (True) (knot)
(UTC)
RMC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
GGA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
GLL ✔ ✔ ✔
VTG ✔ ✔
GSA ✔ ✔
GSV

Sentence Others
RMC Magnetic variation, Mode Indicator
Number of satellites in use, HDOP, Geoidal separation, Age of Differential GPS data,
GGA
Differential reference station ID
GLL Mode Indicator
VTG COG (Magnetic north), SOG (km/h), Mode Indicator
GSA PRN number of satellites used in solution, PDOP, HDOP, VDOP
Total number of sentences, Sentence number, Total number of satellites in view,
GSV
Satellite information (ID, Elevation, Azimuth, S/N)

9-34
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

» GPS RX screen (Received position data of the other station)

Depending on the caller’s TX mode or TX format, the
GPS Position displayed items and these meanings are different. The
Your current position, received position, or GPS following lists describe the items for each category.
Memory Alarm position information is displayed. No data is displayed when no position data is received
(p. 9-3) on your transceiver.
Rotating selects the MY, RX, MEM, and
<1. When the caller’s TX mode is NMEA>
ALM screens.
Displays the caller’s direction from
Compass*
your location.
MY screen (MY Position) Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude.
Compass* Displays your direction. Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude.
Latitude Displays your latitude. Displays the grid locator based on
Longitude Displays your longitude. GL the latitude and longitude of the
caller’s location.
Displays the grid locator based on
GL the latitude and longitude of your ALT Displays the caller’s altitude.
location. Displays the caller’s distance from
DST
ALT Displays your own altitude. your location.

Displays your speed over the Displays the caller’s direction over
SPEED COURSE
ground. the ground.

Displays current time received from SPEED Displays the caller’s speed.
TIME
the GPS. Displays the time that the caller
GPS Time Stamp
COURSE Displays your direction heading. acquired the position data.
Call sign Displays the caller’s call sign.
LLWhen “Position Input” is set to “Manual,” the screen
displays only latitude, longitude, altitude, GL (Grid
locator), and time (internal clock). <2. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Position
(Mobile station)>
Displays the caller’s direction from
Compass*
your location.
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude.
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude.
Displays the grid locator based on
GL the latitude and longitude of the
caller’s location.
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude.
Displays the caller’s distance from
DST
your location.
Displays the caller’s direction over
COURSE
the ground.
SPEED Displays the caller’s speed.
Displays the caller’s D-PRS
Symbol
symbol.
SSID Displays the caller’s SSID.
Displays the time that the caller
GPS Time Stamp
acquired the position data.
Displays the caller’s call sign (with
Call sign
SSID).

* You can change the display type in the QUICK MENU

screen.
9-35
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

» GPS

GPS Position (continued)

<3. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Position <4. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Object/Item>
(Base station)>
Displays the caller’s direction from Displays the Object/Item’s direction
Compass* Compass*
your location. from your location.
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude. Object/Item name Displays the Object/Item’s name.
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude. Latitude Displays the Object/Item’s latitude.
Displays the grid locator based on Displays the Object/Item’s
Longitude
GL the latitude and longitude of the longitude.
caller’s location. Displays the grid locator based on
ALT Displays the caller’s altitude. GL the latitude and longitude of the
Displays the caller’s distance from Object/Item’s location.
DST
your location. ALT Displays the Object/Item’s altitude.
Displays the caller’s TX power Displays the Object/Item’s distance
POWER DST
level. from your location.
Displays the caller’s antenna Displays the Object/Item’s direction
HEIGHT COURSE
height. over the ground.
GAIN Displays the caller’s antenna gain. SPEED Displays the Object/Item’s speed.
Displays the direction of the caller’s Displays the Object/Item’s TX
DIRECT POWER
antenna was pointing. power level.
Displays the caller’s D-PRS Displays the Object/Item’s antenna
Symbol HEIGHT
symbol. height.
SSID Displays the caller’s SSID. Displays the Object/Item’s antenna
GAIN
Displays the time that the caller gain.
GPS Time Stamp
acquired the position data. Displays the direction that the
Displays the caller’s call sign (with DIRECT Object/Item’s antenna was
Call sign pointing.
SSID).
Displays the Object/Item’s D-PRS
Symbol
symbol.
SSID Displays the caller’s SSID.
Displays the time that the caller
GPS Time Stamp
sent the Object’s data.
Displays the caller’s call sign (with
Call sign
SSID).

LLWhen the Object or Item is disabled, “KILLED” is

displayed.

* You can change the display type in the QUICK MENU

screen.
9-36
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

» GPS

GPS Position (continued)

<5. When the caller’s TX format is D-PRS Weather> MEM screen (GPS memory position)
Displays the caller’s direction from Displays GPS Memory channel’s
Compass* Compass*
your location. direction from your location.
Latitude Displays the caller’s latitude. Displays GPS Memory channel’s
Latitude
Longitude Displays the caller’s longitude. latitude.

Displays the grid locator based on Displays GPS Memory channel’s

Longitude
GL the latitude and longitude of the longitude.
caller’s location. Displays the grid locator based on
Displays the caller’s distance from GL the latitude and longitude of the
DST GPS Memory channel.
your location.
Displays the temperature of the Displays GPS Memory channel’s
TEMP DST
caller station’s area. distance from your location.

Displays the rainfall of the caller Displays the caller’s call sign (with
RAIN GPS memory name
station’s area. SSID).

Displays the wind direction of the LLYou can change the GPS Memory in the QUICK MENU
WIND DIR
caller station’s area. screen.
Displays the wind speed of the
WIND SPD ALM screen (GPS alarm position)
caller station’s area.
Displays the barometric pressure of Displays GPS Alarm area’s
BARO Compass*
the caller station’s area. direction from your location.
Displays the humidity of the caller Latitude Displays GPS Alarm area’s latitude.
HUMI
station’s area. Displays GPS Alarm area’s
Longitude
Displays the caller’s D-PRS longitude.
Symbol
symbol. Displays the grid locator based on
SSID Displays the caller’s SSID. GL the latitude and longitude of the
GPS Alarm area.
Displays the time that the caller
GPS Time Stamp Displays GPS Alarm area’s
acquired the position data. DST
distance from your location.
Displays the caller’s call sign (with
Call sign Displays “RX,” GPS memory
SSID).
group name, or GPS memory
GPS Alarm
name specified for the GPS Alarm
function.

LLYou can change the GPS Alarm in the QUICK MENU

screen.

* You can change the display type in the QUICK MENU

screen.
9-37
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

» GPS » GPS > GPS Alarm

GPS Memory Alarm Select (Default: OFF)

The transceiver has 300 GPS memories to save the Selects the target positions for the GPS Alarm
received position data, or often-used position data, function.
with an alphanumeric memory name. •• OFF: Turns OFF the function.
The channels can be divided into the “(No Group)” •• RX: The GPS Alarm sounds when a target (the
group and each Memory group (A to Z) for easy last received position) enters your active
Memory management. alarm range.
•• Group: The GPS Alarm sounds when a target
The display of the GPS MEMORY screen (positions in the GPS Memory, or in the
GPS Memories not assigned to any selected GPS Memory Group) enters your
(No Group)
group active alarm range.
GPS Memories assigned to the •• Memory: The GPS Alarm sounds when a target
A ~ Z: Group Name (the entered position in the GPS Memory)
selected group.
enters your active alarm range.

GPS Memory Groups (A ~ Z)

Alarm Area (Group) (Default: 0.25′)
GPS Memory Group name
GROUP NAME Sets the GPS active alarm range.
(Up to 16 alphanumeric characters)
When a target enters this set active alarm range, the
LLYou can edit the GPS Memory Group name. (p. 9-21) GPS Alarm sounds, and the GPS Alarm icon blinks.
LLWhen “Alarm Select” is set to “Group,” this setting is
GPS Memories enabled.
GPS memory name
NAME
(Up to 16 alphanumeric characters) Ranges differ, depending on the Latitude/Longitude
DATE Saved date unit setting.
•• Latitude/Longitude = ddd°mm.mm′
TIME Saved time
Ranges: 00.08′ to 59.99′ (0.01′ steps)
LATITUDE Saved position (latitude) •• Latitude/Longitude = ddd°mm′mm″
LONGITUDE Saved position (longitude) Ranges: 00′05″ to 59′59″ (0′01″ steps)
ALTITUDE Saved altitude •• Latitude/Longitude = ddd.dddd°
The group letter and the name of Ranges: 0.0014° to 0.9999° (0.0001° steps)
GROUP
the group
Example:
LLWhen you save the received position data on the GPS When a target enters the active alarm range, the GPS
POSITION screen, the received station’s call sign is used Alarm sounds, and the GPS alarm icon blinks.
as the GPS Memory name.
LLIn the QUICK MENU screen, you can edit the GPS N
Point A 0�25′ 0�25′
Memory contents, such as the GPS Memory name.
0�25′

Your location
0�25′

Point B

Point C
Sounds 3 beeps�

9-38
9 GPS OPERATION (ADVANCED)

GPS SET

» GPS > GPS Alarm » GPS

Alarm Area (RX/Memory) (Default: Both) GPS Auto TX (Default: OFF)
Selects the GPS active alarm range. Selects an option for the GPS automatic transmission
When a target enters the active alarm range, the GPS function. This function automatically transmits the
Alarm sounds, and the GPS alarm icon blinks. current position data received from a GPS receiver, as
LLWhen “Alarm Select” is set to “RX” or “Memory,” this well as any entered GPS message, at the set interval.
setting is enabled. (p. 9-38)
•• Limited: The transceiver sounds 3 beeps, and the NOTE: When “GPS TX Mode” is “NMEA,” set
GPS Alarm icon blinks when the target “Position Input” to “Internal GPS.” If you set to
enters the 500 meters range. “Manual,” this function is not activated..
•• Extended: The transceiver sounds 3 beeps, and the
•• OFF: Does not automatically transmit the position
GPS Alarm icon blinks when the target
data. (When you push [PTT], the transceiver
enters the 1 kilometer range.
transmits the position data.)
•• Both: The transceiver sounds a beep, and the
•• 30 sec to 30 min:
GPS Alarm icon blinks when the target
Transmits the current position data at the
enters the 1 kilometer range, and sounds
selected interval (30 seconds, or 1, 3, 5, 10,
3 beeps, and the icon blinks when it
or 30 minutes).
enters the 500 meters range. When the
target exits the 500 meters range, but
is still in the 1 kilometer range, the icon
continues to blink, but no beeps sound.

Example:
When a target station enters the active alarm range
(500 meters or 1 kilometer range, depending on the
setting), the GPS Alarm sounds and the GPS Alarm
icon blinks.

Extended range N
approximately 1 km, 1094 Y

Limited range
approximately 500 m, 547 Y

Your location

Target
station

Sounds a beep� Sounds 3 beeps�

9-39
Section 10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)
Unique features of D-STAR������������������������������������������������������������������������10-2
What is D-STAR?���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-2
About the DR function��������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-3
Ways to Communicate with the DR function����������������������������������������������10-3
DV and DD modes�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-3
Enter your call sign (MY) into the transceiver���������������������������������������������10-4
Register your call sign at a gateway repeater��������������������������������������������10-5
Making a Simplex call���������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-6
Accessing repeaters�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-7
Receiving����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-8
Capturing a call sign�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-9
Making a Local CQ call������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-9
Making a Gateway CQ call�����������������������������������������������������������������������10-10
Calling an individual station����������������������������������������������������������������������10-10
Saving to Memory channels��������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-11
About Reflectors���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-12
DD What is a reflector?���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-12
DD Unlinking a reflector���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-12
DD Linking to a reflector��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-13
DD Using a reflector��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-14
DD Reflector Echo Testing����������������������������������������������������������������������������������10-14
DD Requesting repeater information�������������������������������������������������������������������10-15
Updating the repeater list�������������������������������������������������������������������������10-15
When receiving no reply���������������������������������������������������������������������������10-16

10-1
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

Unique features of D-STAR

•• Easy Cross band operation through a repeater •• Easy call sign entry with the Repeater list or TX/
RX History
•• The Call Sign Capture key makes call sign
capture easy!
INTERNET

430MHz 1200MHz

CQCQ CQCQ

IMPORTANT! Before starting D-STAR, the following steps are required.

STEP 1 Enter your call sign (MY) into the transceiver. (p. 10-4)
STEP 2 Register your call sign (MY) to a gateway repeater. (p. 10-5)
STEP 3 Enter your D-STAR equipment into your registration form. (p. 10-5)

► You have completed the steps!!

What is D-STAR?
•• D-STAR is a digital protocol standard developed by the Japan Amateur Radio League (JARL). The system
includes the DV mode for Digital Voice and the DD mode for Digital Data communications.
•• D-STAR supports a comprehensive repeater system linked through the Internet, enabling you to make QSOs
with stations near or far from your location.
•• D-STAR supports the DV mode at 4.8 kbps. Your call sign data, and either a short message, or GPS data can be
transmitted simultaneously with your voice signal.

Advanced Amateur radio technology of D-STAR

The DV mode has a bandwidth of only 6 kHz, compared to 16 kHz for the analog FM mode, with 5 kHz deviation.
D-STAR utilizes the well-known GMSK modulation method that makes very efficient use of occupied bandwidth.
D-STAR (F7W) FM (F3E)

fo Frequency fo Frequency
6 kHz 16 kHz

10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz

20 kHz 20 kHz 20 kHz 20 kHz

D-STAR occupies 10 kHz. The sound quality is The regular FM mode occupies 20 kHz that is
good, even though the bandwidth is narrow. double the bandwidth of D-STAR.

10-2
 10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

About the DR function DV and DD modes

You can easily use D-STAR repeaters with the DV (Digital Voice) mode
D-STAR Repeater (DR) function. With this function, •• Clear voice communication
you can select the preset repeater or frequency in •• Simultaneous communication of the voice and
“FROM” (access repeater), and a target call sign in simple data
“TO” (destination) on the DR screen, as shown right.
DD (Digital Data) mode
NOTE: If the repeater set in “FROM” (Access •• 128 kbps data communication
Repeater) has no Gateway, you cannot make a •• Internet connection
Gateway call. LLSee section 13 for details of the DD mode.

To display the DR screen, hold down for 1 second.

Management
Data Server

Destination
(Repeater/Station) INTERNET
Access repeater
Repeater Repeater
PC PC

Ways to Communicate with the DR function

With the DR function, the transceiver has 3 ways to Local Area call
communicate. Access Area 1
Repeater Repeater
Local Area call: To call through your local area
(access) repeater.
LLYou can use an FM repeater.
Gateway call: To call through your local area Area 1
(access) repeater, repeater gateway,
and the Internet to your destination
repeater or individual station’s last Gateway call
used repeater, using Call Sign Trust Server
Routing.
Simplex call: To call another station not using a Area 1 Area 2
Repeater Repeater
repeater.
INTERNET
NOTE:
Area 1 Area 2
•• Using the repeater list is required to use the DR
function. (p. 10-15)
•• Before operating in the Duplex mode, BE SURE
to check whether the repeater is busy or not. If the Simplex call
repeater is busy, wait until it is clear, or ask for a ‛break’
using a method acceptable to your local procedures.
•• The transceiver has the Time-Out Timer function for the
DV Repeater operation. The timer limits a continuous
transmission. Warning beeps will sound approximately
30 seconds before time-out and then again immediately
before the time-out.

To begin Digital mode communication using other than the DR function

To begin Digital mode communication using other For a Local area call or Gateway call:
than the DR function, you can use the VFO mode, 1. Set the access repeater’s frequency.
Memory mode, or Call Channel mode. This manual 2. Set the Duplex direction and frequency offset.
description focuses on the DR function operation, (p. 1-20)
which can be easily set up. If you want to use 3. Set the call signs (UR/R1/R2). (p. 11-36)
other than the DR function, see the procedures
as described to the right, or select a repeater in a For a Simplex call:
Memory channel. 1. Set the operating frequency.
2. Set the call signs (UR/R1/R2). (p. 11-36)

10-3
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

Enter your call sign (MY) into the transceiver

To operate D-STAR, you must first enter your call sign Example: Enter “JA3YUA” as your own call sign into
into the MY call sign memory. You can enter up to 6 “1.”
MY call signs. 1. Open the MY CALL SIGN (DV) screen.
» SET > My Station > My Call Sign (DV)
NOTE: 2. Touch the number for 1 second.
•• Your MY call sign must match the call sign registered on
a gateway repeater. (p. 10-5)
•• The MY Call sign in the instructions is ONLY an
example that is used in explanations. You MUST enter
your own call sign, the one that was assigned to you
and is on your license.

3. Touch “Edit.”

4. Enter your own call sign, then touch [ENT].

5. Touch the entered call sign.

•• Sets the call sign to be used as MY call sign.

6. To close the MY STATION screen, push
several times.

TIP: You can enter a note of up to 4 characters, such

as the model of the transceiver, name, area name,
after your call sign.

10-4
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

Register your call sign at a gateway repeater

To make a Gateway call through the Internet, you Step 2. Register your call sign
must register your call sign at a repeater that has a 1. Follow the registration instructions found there.
gateway, usually one near you. 2. When you receive a notification from the
administrator, your call sign registration has been
About the registration process described: approved.
This section describes the call sign registration NOTE: It may take a few days for the administrator
process at a repeater that is connected to the US to approve you.
Trust server.
There are other systems as well, and they have their
own registration process. For information on how to
Step 3. Register your personal information
register on one of them, contact the administrator of
a repeater that uses the alternate system. After your registration is approved, log in your
personal account with your registered call sign and
NOTE: If needed, ask the gateway repeater password.
administrator for call sign registration instructions.

Step 1. Access the call sign registration screen

1. Access the following URL to find the gateway
repeater closest to you. Click
http://www.dstarusers.org/repeaters.php
2. Click the call sign of the repeater that you want to
register to.
3. Click the “Gateway Registration URL:” link
address.
•• The “D-STAR Gateway System” screen is displayed.
4. Click <Register> to start the New User
registration. Step 4. Register your D-Star equipment
1. Register your D-STAR equipment information.
Ask the gateway repeater administrator for details.
2. When your registration is complete, log out of your
personal account, and start using the D-STAR
network.
NOTE: You must register your D-STAR equipment
BEFORE you can make Gateway Repeater calls.

Click

10-5
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

IMPORTANT!
•• The repeater list, described in this manual, may differ
Making a Simplex call
from your transceiver’s preloaded contents.
•• Although Japanese repeaters are used in the setting This section describes simplex operation (through no
examples, the Japanese repeater node (port) letters are repeater).
different from other country’s.
NOTE: The frequencies may be different, depending
BE SURE to add the repeater node letter in the 8th digit
of the call sign, according to the frequency band shown
on the transceiver’s version. Check for usable
below. frequencies for your operating area.
1200 MHz: A (B in Japan)
430 MHz: B (A in Japan) What is a Simplex Call?
144 MHz: C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan) A simplex call is a direct call to another station on a
single frequency, not using a repeater.

Example: Making a simplex call on 445.670 MHz.

Step 1. Set “FROM” (Simplex channel)
1. Hold down for 1 second to display the DR
screen.
2. Touch “FROM” to select, and then touch “FROM”
again.

3. Touch “Repeater List.”

4. Touch “Simplex.”
5. Touch the desired frequency.
(Example: 445.670 MHz)

•• Return to the DR screen, and the selected frequency

is displayed in “FROM.”
•• “CQCQCQ” is displayed in “TO.”
LLIf a station call sign is set in “TO,” select “Local CQ”
in the “TO SELECT” screen to set “CQCQCQ” in
“TO.”
Step 2. Hold down [PTT] to transmit
1. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.
•• The TX indicator lights red while transmitting.
2. Release [PTT] to receive.

TIP: You can change the simplex frequencies.

(p. 11-29)
» DV/DD MEMORY > Repeater List

10-6
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

Accessing repeaters
This section describes how to check whether or Step 2. Set “TO” (Destination)
not you can access a local area repeater (access 1. Touch “TO” twice.
repeater), and if your signal is successfully sent to a
destination repeater.
TIP: If your call sign (MY) has not been set, or your
call sign and equipment have not been registered at
a D-STAR repeater, see pages 10-4 and 10-5.
2. Touch “Gateway CQ.”
Step 1. Set “FROM” (Access repeater)
1. Hold down for 1 second to display the DR
screen.
2. Touch “FROM” to select, and then touch “FROM”
again.

•• Displays the REPEATER GROUP screen.

3. Touch the repeater group where your destination
repeater is listed.
3. Touch “Repeater List.”
4. Touch your destination repeater.
(Example: Melbourne)

•• Displays the REPEATER GROUP screen.

4. Touch the repeater group where your access
•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater
repeater is listed. name is displayed in “TO.”
5. Touch your access repeater. (Example: Kirkland)
Step 3. Check whether you can access the
repeater
Hold down [PTT] for 1 second to access the repeater.

•• If you get a reply call, or “UR?” is displayed within 3

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater seconds, your signal reached your access repeater and
name is displayed in “FROM.” your call was successfully sent to your destination
LLBy just selecting the repeater name, the repeater repeater.
call sign, its frequency, duplex setting, and frequency
offset are automatically set.
LLThe repeater list here is just an example.
TIP: There are several ways to set the access
repeater. (p. 11-2)
•• Rotate on the DR screen with “FROM” is
selected.
TIP: See page 10-16 for status indications after a
•• Search for the nearest repeater. reply is received.
•• Set from the TX History.
•• Search for a repeater using the DR scan.

10-7
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

Receiving
When a DV call is received, the call signs of the caller, Step 2. Save the destination call sign into Your
the called station, and the called station’s access Call Sign memory from RX History
repeater are saved in the RX History. Up to 50 calls 1. Rotate to select the RX history record
can be saved. with the call sign that you want to save to memory.
Even if you turn OFF the transceiver, the RX History is 2. Touch [DETAIL].
retained. 3. Push .
This section describes how to display the RX History 4. Touch “Add To Your Memory.”
screen and how to save the call sign in Your Call Sign
memory.

When receiving a call from “JM1ZLK”:

5. Touch the call sign that you want to save.

(Example: “JM1ZLK”)

The S-meter and the caller’s call sign are displayed.

Step 1. To display a received call sign

Open the RX HISTORY screen. 6. Touch “NAME.”
» CD 7. Enter a name of up to 16 characters, then touch
[ENT].
•• Rotate to display other RX history records.

Received repeater name, or frequency

Operating mode

Record number
Caller station*
Called station

LLSee “Keyboard entering and editing” in the Basic

manual for details.
8. Touch “<<Add Write>>.”

Received data and time Displays

detailed screen
Sets the call sign to “TO”
(destination)

* The caller name is displayed when the name is set in the

“Your Call Sign” list. 9. Touch [YES].
Push to switch between name display and call sign
display.
LL“/” and a note may be displayed after the call sign.
LLIf a call is received from an area, not from a specific
station, “CQCQCQ” is displayed.

•• Returns to the RX HISTORY DETAIL screen.

10. To close the RX HISTORY screen, push
several times.

10-8
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

Capturing a call sign Making a Local CQ call

After you receive a signal, the calling station’s call You can make a Local CQ call when “TO”
sign can be captured by holding down the Call Sign (Destination) is set to “Local CQ.”
Capture key ( ) for 1 second. After releasing,
you can quickly and easily reply to the call.
What is a Local CQ Call?
To call a CQ through only your local area (access)
What is the Call Sign Capture key? repeater.
Holding down the Call Sign Capture key for 1
second sets the last received station’s call sign as a
temporary destination, and makes replying quick and Step 1. Set “FROM” (Access repeater)
easy.
LLSame as described in page 10-7.

Step 1. Set the received call sign to “TO” Step 2. Set “TO” (Destination)
(Destination) 1. Touch “TO” twice.
While receiving, hold down for 1 second.
•• Announces the station call sign.

2. Touch “Local CQ.”

LLInformation
•• If you want to select another call sign in the RX History,
push , and then rotate .
•• When a received signal is weak, or during a DV scan, the
call sign may not be correctly received. In that case, you
cannot capture the call sign.
•• When “RX>CS SPEECH” is set to “OFF,” the transceiver
does not announce the call sign.
» SET > Function > SPEECH > •• Returns to the DR screen, and “CQCQCQ” is
displayed in “TO.”
RX>CS SPEECH

Step 3. Hold down [PTT] to transmit

Step 2. Hold down [PTT] to transmit 1. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.
1. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.

2. Release [PTT] to receive.

2. Release [PTT] to receive.
LLPush to return to the previous call sign setting.
TIP: The Local CQ call is used to call anyone, but
you can call a specific station by simply saying their
call sign.

10-9
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

Making a Gateway CQ call Calling an individual station

You can make a Gateway CQ call when a destination You can make a call to an individual station when the
repeater is selected in “TO” (Destination). station call sign is selected in “TO” (Destination).
When you call an individual station through a gateway,
your call is automatically sent to the last repeater
What is a Gateway CQ Call?
•• Calling CQ through a repeater connected to the Internet. that the station accessed. So, even if you don’t know
•• You can call CQ to areas where you cannot directly where the station is, you can make a call using Call
access, because the communication is routed through Sign Routing.
the Internet.
Step 1. Set “FROM” (Access repeater)
LLSame as described in page 10-7.
Step 1. Set “FROM” (Access repeater)
LLSame as described in page 10-7.
Step 2. Set “TO” (Destination)
1. Touch “TO” twice.
Step 2. Set “TO” (Destination)
1. Touch “TO” twice.

2. Touch “Your Call Sign.”

2. Touch “Gateway CQ.”

3. Touch your destination station. (Example: Rick)

•• Displays the REPEATER GROUP screen.

3. Touch the repeater group where your destination
repeater is listed.
4. Touch your destination repeater. •• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected name is
(Example: Hirano) displayed in “TO.”

Step 3. Hold down [PTT] to transmit

1. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.
•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater
name is displayed in “TO.”

Step 3. Hold down [PTT] to transmit

1. Hold down [PTT] to transmit. 2. Release [PTT] to receive.

2. Release [PTT] to receive.

NOTE: If the selected access repeater is not
connected to the Internet, is displayed. In
that case, you cannot select “Gateway CQ.”

10-10
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

Saving to Memory channels

When “FROM” (Access repeater) and “TO” Step 2. Viewing the saved contents
(Destination) settings are saved to a Memory channel, 1. Hold down for 1 second to cancel the DR
the settings can be selected by rotating in the screen.
Memory mode. 2. Select the Memory mode.
3. Rotate to select the saved channel.
Step 1. Saving settings into memory (Example: channel 00 in group 00)
1. On the DR screen, select the “FROM” and “TO”
settings to be saved into memory.
2. Push .
3. Touch “Memory Write.”

Memory name

TIP: Checking the Memory contents

You can check the Memory contents on the
MEMORY screen.

4. Touch “Write to a New Channel.” 1. Open the MEMORY screen.

» MEMORY

2. Touch a group that contains the Memory

channel you want to check. (Example: 00)

5. Touch the desired Memory channel.

(Example: channel 00 in group 00)
LLTo change a memory group, touch [GROUP].

Touch to change
a memory group.

6. Touch [YES].

•• The operating data is entered in the selected

channel. “FROM” and “TO” names are automatically
entered as the Memory name.
(Up to 16 alphanumeric characters.)

10-11
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

About Reflectors
DDWhat is a reflector? DDUnlinking a reflector
A reflector is a special server connected to the Internet Before trying to link to another reflector, BE SURE to
and running a version of the D-Plus software. If the unlink the reflector that is currently connected to the
D-Plus software is installed on your access repeater, repeater.
it provides various functions including gateway
and reflector linking capabilities (It is known as the
NOTE: If a reflector is already connected, ask on
D-STAR reflector system). The D-STAR reflector
the air whether or not you can change reflectors
system enables a number of D-STAR repeaters
and wait for responses. BE SURE to reconnect
anywhere to link to a reflector. This means that when
back to the same reflector when you finish your
you transmit through a D-STAR repeater linked to a
conversation.
reflector, your voice can be heard on other repeaters
linked to the reflector, and you can hear other stations 1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.
that are connected to the reflector.

D-STAR reflector system

Reflector
2. Touch “Reflector.”

Access
repeater CAN

INTERNET

UK
USA

3. Touch “Unlink Reflector.”

AUS

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Unlink Reflector” and

“U” are displayed in “TO.”

4. Hold down [PTT] to unlink the reflector.

10-12
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

About Reflectors

DDLinking to a reflector Direct inputting a Reflector

If your repeater is not currently linked to a reflector, or TX History saves up to 5 reflectors that your access
if you want to change it to another reflector, follow the repeater linked to before.
steps below. Before linking to another reflector, BE
SURE to unlink any current reflector. (p. 10-12) Example: Select “REF010BL” in TX History.
1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.
Direct inputting a Reflector
1. Example: Directly entering “REF010BL.”
2. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.

2. Touch “Reflector.”

3. Touch “Reflector.”

3. Touch “Link to Reflector.”

4. Touch “Link to Reflector.”

4. Touch the reflector that you want to link to.

5. Touch “Direct Input.”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Link to Reflector” and

“REF010BL” are displayed in “TO.”
6. Touch [+] or [–] to select the reflector type,
reflector number, and module letter, then touch
[SET].

5. Hold down [PTT] to link to the reflector.

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Link to Reflector” and

entered reflector is displayed in “TO.”

7. Hold down [PTT] to link to the reflector.

10-13
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

About Reflectors

DDUsing a reflector DDReflector Echo Testing

1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again. To confirm that your signal is correctly getting into the
repeater, you can transmit a short message as a trial.
After stopping transmission, your message will be
played back.

1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.

2. Touch “Reflector.”

2. Touch “Reflector.”

3. Touch “Use Reflector.”

3. Touch “Echo Test.”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Use Reflector” and

“CQCQCQ” are displayed in “TO.”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Echo Test” and “E”

4. Hold down [PTT] to transmit. are displayed in “TO.”

4. Hold down [PTT] and speak into the microphone.

5. Release [PTT] to hear your message.

10-14
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

About Reflectors Updating the repeater list

DDRequesting repeater information For easy operation, a repeater list is preloaded into
When you send the repeater information command, your transceiver.
an ID message is sent back. You can download the repeater list from the Icom
website.
1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.
NOTE:
•• Before using an SD card, see the Basic manual for
details of a card.
•• See “Updating the repeater list” that can be downloaded
from the Icom website about how to update the repeater
2. Touch “Reflector.” list using an SD card.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/

3. Touch “Repeater Information.”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “Repeater

Information” and “I” are displayed in “TO.”

4. Hold down [PTT] to transmit the repeater

Information command.
5. Release [PTT] to hear the repeater ID message.

10-15
10 D-STAR OPERATION (BASIC)

When receiving no reply

To communicate through a repeater, your signal must access the repeater. The following chart is designed to help
you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions.

Problem Possible Cause Solution REF.

After your call, the repeater does not A repeater settings are incorrect. Select the correct repeater. p. 10-7
return a status reply. Correct the repeater frequency, –
frequency offset, or duplex settings.
Your transmission did not reach the Wait until you are closer to the –
repeater. repeater and try again.
Try to access another repeater. –
After your call, ‘UR?’ and its call sign The call was successfully sent, but Wait for a while, and try again. –
are displayed. no station immediately replied.
After your call, ‘RX’ or ‘RPT?’ and Your own call sign (MY) has not been Set your own call sign (MY). p. 10-4
the access repeater’s call sign are set.
displayed. Your own call sign (MY) has not been Register your own call sign (MY) on p. 10-5
registered on a gateway repeater, or a gateway repeater, or confirm the
the registered contents do not match registration of the call sign.
your transceiver’s settings.
After your call, ‘RPT?’ and the access The call sign of the destination Correctly set the destination –
repeater’s call sign are displayed. repeater is incorrect. repeater’s call sign.
After your call, ‘RPT?’ and the The repeater cannot connect to the Check the repeater settings. –
destination repeater’s call sign are destination repeater.
displayed. The repeater is busy. Wait for a while, and try it again. –

Even when holding down , the DR There is no repeater list in your Import the list using an SD card. p. 10-15
screen is not displayed. transceiver. Directly enter the Repeater list data p. 11-24
into the transceiver.
The Lock function is activated. Hold down for 1 second to turn –
OFF the Lock function.

Even when you push , the The call sign has not been correctly Try it again, after the transceiver has –
received call sign will not be set to the received. correctly received the call sign.
destination call sign. When a weak signal is received, or
a signal is received during scanning,
the call sign may not be received
correctly. In that case, “--------” is
displayed and error beeps sound,
and a reply call cannot be made.
A Local area call can be made, but a MY call sign has not been registered. Register your own call sign (MY) on p. 10-5
Gateway call, or destination station a gateway repeater, or confirm the
call, cannot be made. registration of the call sign.
The repeater set in “FROM” (Access Check the repeater settings. p. 10-5
repeater) has no Gateway.
“L” is displayed. While receiving through the Internet, Wait a while, and try it again. –
some packets may be lost due When the transceiver receives
to a network error (or poor data corrupted data, and misidentifies it is
throughput performance). as packet loss, “L” is displayed, even
if it is a Local area call.
“DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink. While in the DV mode, an FM signal Use a different operating frequency p. 11-17
is received. until there are no FM signals on the
original frequency.

10-16
Section 11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)
“FROM” (Access repeater) setting������������������������������������������������������������� 11-2
DD Using your transceiver’s repeater list��������������������������������������������������������������11-3
DD Using the DR scan������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-4
DD Using the Near Repeater Search function�������������������������������������������������������11-5
DD Using TX History���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-6
“TO” (Destination) setting��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-7
DD Making a “Local CQ” (Local Area) call�������������������������������������������������������������11-8
DD Making a “Gateway CQ” (Gateway) call����������������������������������������������������������11-8
DD Using “Your Call Sign”�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-8
DD Using RX History���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-9
DD Using TX History���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-9
DD Directly entering (UR)������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-10
DD Directly entering (RPT)����������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-10
REPEATER DETAIL screen��������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-11
Message operation����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-12
DD Entering a TX message���������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-12
DD Transmitting a message��������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-12
DD Deleting a TX message���������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-12
Viewing received call signs����������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-13
DD Viewing the call signs on the RX History screen�������������������������������������������11-13
BK mode communication������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-15
EMR communication�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-16
DD Adjusting the EMR AF level���������������������������������������������������������������������������11-16
Automatic DV detection���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-17
Automatic Reply function�������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-18
DD Recording an Auto Reply message���������������������������������������������������������������11-19
DD When receiving a position data���������������������������������������������������������������������11-20
Data communication��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-21
DD Connection����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-21
DD Data communication application setting��������������������������������������������������������11-21
DD Sending data�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-21
DD DV Fast Data function�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-22
Digital squelch functions��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-23
DD The Digital Call Sign squelch setting�������������������������������������������������������������11-23
DD The Digital Code Squelch setting������������������������������������������������������������������11-23
Repeater list��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-24
DD Repeater list contents������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-24
Entering new information into the repeater list����������������������������������������� 11-25
DD Required items for the communication cases�����������������������������������������������11-25
DD Entering new information into the repeater list����������������������������������������������11-26
DD Editing repeater data�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-29
DD Deleting repeater data�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-30
DD Rearranging the display order of the repeaters���������������������������������������������11-31
DD Adding new repeater information from RX History����������������������������������������11-31
DD Skip setting for the DR scan��������������������������������������������������������������������������11-32
DD Entering or editing a repeater group name����������������������������������������������������11-33
Your Call Sign������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-34
DD Entering Your Call Sign���������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-34
DD Deleting Your Call Sign����������������������������������������������������������������������������������11-35
DD Rearranging the display order of Your Call Signs������������������������������������������11-35
Manually setting Call Signs���������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-36
Are your settings correct?������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11-37

11-1
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (Access repeater) setting

Your access repeater must be set in “FROM” when you make a call on the DR screen.
You have 5 ways to select the access repeater.

By rotating
Select the preset repeater on the DR screen by touching “FROM” and then
rotating .

Displayed while rotating .

When you know your access repeater:

From the repeater list (p. 11-3)

When your access repeater is in your transceiver’s repeater list, you can
select it by selecting the repeater area and name, if entered, or call sign.

When you do not know which repeater you can access:

Search for a repeater using the DR scan (p. 11-4)

The Normal DR scan searches for output repeater frequencies or simplex
signals.
You can also find FM repeaters.

The Near Repeater scan searches for output repeater frequencies of

nearby repeaters by using your location and the repeater’s location, if it is
entered in the Repeater List.

Search for the nearest repeater (p. 11-5)

The transceiver searches for the nearest repeaters by using your location
and the repeater’s location, if it is entered in the Repeater List.
The nearest repeaters in your transceiver’s Repeater List are displayed as
selectable choices.
You can select a nearby DV, FM, or DD repeater type.

When the “FROM” data is saved in the TX History:

Select from the TX History (p. 11-6)

Select a repeater that you have accessed before, from the TX History
record.

11-2
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (Access repeater) setting

DDUsing your transceiver’s repeater list

When your access repeater is in your transceiver’s TIP:
repeater list, you can select it from the list. By just When you select an FM repeater:
selecting the repeater from the list, the repeater call When an FM repeater is in your transceiver’s
sign, its frequency, duplex setting, and frequency repeater list, you can select it from the list.
offset are automatically set, for easy operation. When selecting an FM repeater, the “TO” setting is
not necessary, and a “---” is displayed in “TO.”
Example: S  electing the “Kirkland” repeater in
Washington state in the USA from the
repeater list.
1. Hold down for 1 second to display the DR
screen.
2. Touch “FROM” to select, and then touch “FROM” When selecting an FM repeater.
again.
How to change the repeater group:
To change the repeater group on the DR screen,
push , then touch “Group Select.”

3. Touch “Repeater List.”

•• Displays the REPEATER GROUP screen.

4. Touch the repeater group where your access
repeater is listed.
5. Touch your access repeater. (Example: Kirkland)

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater

name is displayed in “FROM.”
LLSee page 10-6 “IMPORTANT!” about the node
letters.
LLBy just selecting the repeater name, the repeater
call sign, its frequency, duplex setting, and frequency
offset are automatically set.

11-3
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (Access repeater) setting

DDUsing the DR scan

The DR scan scans frequencies to find a signal from a Example: Selecting an active repeater using the DR
repeater, or on a simplex frequency. scan.
You can use 2 kinds of DR scans, Normal scan and 1. Hold down for 1 second to display the DR
Near Repeater scan. screen.
2. Touch “FROM” to select.
Normal scan
The Normal scan searches repeaters whose “USE
(FROM)” setting is set to “YES.”
LLYou can change the “USE (FROM)” setting on the
repeater list.
» DV/DD MEMORY > Repeater List 3. Push .
•• Displays the SCAN SELECT screen.
4. Touch the scan type.
Near Repeater scan •• Normal:
The Near Repeater scan searches for up to 20 Searches for repeaters whose “USE (FROM)” setting
nearby repeaters by using your position data and the is set to “YES.”
repeater’s entered position data, and then lists the •• Near Repeater (DV/FM):
repeaters. Searches for up to 20 each of nearby DV or FM
LLThe Near Repeater scan continues, even if you turn OFF repeaters. (A total of 40 repeaters can be displayed.)
the transceiver, and then turn it ON again during the scan. •• Near Repeater (DV):
LLIf your own position data is not being received from GPS Searches for up to 20 nearby DV repeaters.
satellites, the last received position data is used. •• Near Repeater (FM):
Searches for up to 20 nearby FM repeaters.

NOTE: Even if your transceiver receives a repeater •• The selected scan starts.
signal, the repeater may not receive your signal, •• In the DR scan, the repeaters are sequentially
because the repeater’s output power is higher than displayed by distance, in descending order.
your transceiver’s, and your signal does not reach LLThe scan resumes the same as other scans.
the repeater.
TIP: The DR scan scans the simplex frequencies in
the repeater list, in addition to D-STAR repeaters.

Blinks The repeaters are

sequentially displayed.

5. When the transceiver receives a signal from a

repeater, the scan stops. Push .

•• The DR scan is canceled, and the repeater is set in

“FROM.”

11-4
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (Access repeater) setting

DDUsing the Near Repeater Search function

The transceiver searches for the nearest repeaters by Step 2. Selecting the access repeater from the
using your location and the repeater’s entered position Near Repeater list
data. 1. Hold down for 1 second to display the DR
The nearest repeaters in your transceiver’s repeater screen.
list are displayed as selectable options. 2. Touch “FROM” to select, and then touch “FROM”
again.
NOTE:
•• When using the Near Repeater Search function, BE
SURE to first receive your own GPS position data, or
manually enter your position data.
•• If no repeater is found within a 160 kilometer (100 miles)
of your location, “No Repeater Found” is displayed. 3. Touch “Near Repeater.”
•• If the last received position data can be used, “GPS is •• Displays the NEAR REPEATER screen.
invalid. Search by last valid position” is displayed. 4. Touch the type of nearby repeater to display.
•• Near Repeater (ALL):
Displays up to 20 nearby each of DV, FM, and DD
Example: S
 electing a nearby repeater from the Near repeaters. (A total of 60 repeaters can be displayed.)
Repeater list. •• Near Repeater (DV):
Displays up to 20 nearby DV repeaters.
Step 1. R eceiving your own location from GPS
•• Near Repeater (FM):
satellites
Displays up to 20 nearby FM repeaters.
Confirm the GPS receiver is receiving the satellites •• Near Repeater (DD):
signals. Displays up to 20 nearby DD repeaters.
The GPS icon blinks when searching for satellites. 5. Touch the repeater to use as your access
repeater, considering the distance from your
→ → → (no icon)
location to the repeater.
The GPS icon stops blinking when the minimum Repeater call sign
needed number of satellites are found.

LLIt may take only a few seconds to receive, or it may take

a few minutes, depending on your operating environment.
LLEven when “Position Input” is set to “Manual,” the icon is
displayed.
» GPS > GPS Set > Position Input
LLIf your own location is not being received, the last
Distance and direction* from
received location is used for your current location.
your location to the repeater

LL“FM” is displayed for FM repeaters, and “DD” is

displayed for DD repeaters.
* When “POSITION” (p. 11-28) is set to “Approximate”
on the repeater list, the direction data is not
displayed if the distance to the repeater is less than 5
kilometers.
» DV/DD MEMORY > Repeater List
•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater
is set in “FROM.”

11-5
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“FROM” (Access repeater) setting

DDUsing TX History
TX History saves up to 10 of the latest Access (From) TIP: When you touch the repeater for 1 second in
repeaters you transmitted on. You can select a step 5, you can display the REPEATER DETAIL
repeater from TX History as your access repeater. screen, or delete the repeater information from the
TX HISTORY screen.
Example: S  electing the “Hirano” repeater from TX
History.
1. Hold down for 1 second to display the DR
screen.
2. Touch “FROM” to select, and then touch “FROM”
again.

3. Touch “TX History.”

•• Displays the TX HISTORY screen.
4. Touch the TX History type.
(Example: TX History (DV))

•• TX History (DV):
Displays the TX History of the DV repeaters.
•• TX History (FM):
Displays the TX History of the FM repeaters.
•• TX History (DD):
Displays the TX History of the DD repeaters.
5. Touch the repeater to use it as your access
repeater.

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater

is set in “FROM.”

11-6
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“TO” (Destination) setting

“CQCQCQ,” a destination repeater, or a station call TIP: After you receive the individual station or
sign must be set in “TO” when you make a call in the repeater’s signal, the call sign can be captured by
DV mode. You have 8 ways to set “TO” (destination). holding down the Call Sign Capture key ( ), and
you can quickly and easily reply to a call.

By rotating
Select the repeater or Your Call Sign that is
displayed by rotating on the DR screen.
(This operation is disabled when “CQCQCQ” is set.)

To make a Local Area CQ call:

Set “CQCQCQ” in “TO” (Destination). (p. 11-8)

To make a Gateway CQ call:

Select a repeater from the repeater list, if you want
to make a Gateway call. (p. 11-8)

To make a call to a specific station:

Select the station call sign in the Your Call Sign list.
(p. 11-8)

To make a call through a reflector:

Select a reflector that is connected to the repeater
you want to call through. (p. 10-12)

To select from RX History:

When you receive a call, the caller station data is
saved in RX History. You can select the destination
from the record. (p. 11-9)

To select from TX History:

When you make a call, the destination repeater or
called station data is saved in TX History. You can
select the destination from the record. (p. 11-9)

To directly enter the destination station call sign:

Directly enter the destination station’s call sign.
(p. 11-10)

To directly enter the destination repeater call sign:

Directly enter the destination repeater’s call sign.
(p. 11-10)

11-7
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“TO” (Destination) setting

DDMaking a “Local CQ” (Local Area) call DDUsing “Your Call Sign”
When “Local CQ” is selected on the TO SELECT The “Your Call Sign” memory saves individual or
screen, “CQCQCQ” is set in “TO.” repeater station call signs. When you select the call
sign for the “TO” (Destination) setting, you can make
Example: M aking a Local area call by accessing the a Gateway call. When you call an individual station
“Kirkland” repeater. through a gateway, the signal is automatically sent to
1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again. the last repeater that the individual station accessed.
Therefore, even if you do not know where the
individual station is located, you can make a call.

NOTE: If the repeater, set in “FROM” (Access

repeater) has no Gateway call sign, you cannot
2. Touch “Local CQ.”
make a gateway call.

Example: Selecting “Rick” from “Your Call Sign.”

1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.

•• Returns to the DR screen, and “CQCQCQ” is

displayed in “TO.”
2. Touch “Your Call Sign.”
•• Displays the YOUR CALL SIGN screen.
DDMaking a “Gateway CQ” (Gateway) call 3. Touch your destination station. (Example: Rick)
When “Gateway CQ” is selected on the TO SELECT
screen, you can select the repeater from the repeater
list to make a gateway call.

Example: M aking a Gateway CQ call to the “Hirano”

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected name is
repeater from the “Kirkland” repeater.
displayed in “TO.”
1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.

TIP: After selecting a destination repeater or station,

you can select another repeater or station preset in
your transceiver by rotating .

2. Touch “Gateway CQ.”

•• Displays the REPEATER GROUP screen.
3. Touch the repeater group where your destination
repeater is listed.
4. Touch your destination repeater.
(Example: Hirano)

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater

name is displayed in “TO.”

11-8
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“TO” (Destination) setting

DDUsing RX History DDUsing TX History

When a call is received in the DV mode, the call data TX History saves the repeater and station name and
is saved in the RX History. call sign of up to 20 “TO” (Destination) settings that
Up to 50 callers, and only the last called call signs, for were used when you made the calls.
a total of 51 histories can be saved.
NOTE: Until you make a call in the DV mode, you
Example: S
 electing “Rick” in the RX History.
cannot select “TO” (destination) from the TX History.
1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.
Example: Selecting the “Hirano” repeater in the TX
History
1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.

2. Touch “RX History.”

2. Touch “TX History.”

•• Displays the RX HISTORY screen.

3. Touch a destination name or call sign.
(Example: Rick)
•• Displays the TX HISTORY screen.
3. Touch a destination repeater.
(Example: Hirano)

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected name is

displayed in “TO.”

TIP: To add RX HISTORY data to a “Your Call Sign” •• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater
memory, push , then touch “Add To Your name is displayed in “TO.”
Memory.”
TIP: You can add the TX HISTORY data to memory,
or delete it from the TX HISTORY screen.
Push , then touch the option.

11-9
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

“TO” (Destination) setting

DDDirectly entering (UR) DDDirectly entering (RPT)

The destination station call sign can be directly The destination repeater call sign can be directly
entered. entered.

Example: D
 irectly entering the call sign “JM1ZLK.”
NOTE: BE SURE to include the node letter as the
8th digit. See page 10-6 “IMPORTANT!” about the
1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.
node letters.

Example: Directly entering the call sign “JP3YDH A.”

1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.

2. Touch “Direct Input (UR).”

2. Touch “Direct Input (RPT).”

•• Displays the DIRECT INPUT (UR) screen.

3. Enter the station’s call sign of up to 8 characters,
including spaces.

•• Displays the DIRECT INPUT (RPT) screen.

3. Enter a repeater call sign of up to 8 characters,
including spaces. (Example: JP3YDH A)

4. After entering, touch [ENT].

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the entered call sign is
displayed in “TO.”
LLAfter entry, you can edit the call sign in the DIRECT
INPUT (UR) screen.
LLThe entered call sign remains on the DIRECT INPUT
(UR) screen, until you enter a new call sign.
•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater
name is displayed in “TO.”
TIP: If the entered call sign has a duplicate in the LLAfter entry, you can edit the call sign in the DIRECT
“Your Call Sign” memory, the name is displayed. INPUT (RPT) screen.
(Only when the name has been entered.) LLThe entered call sign remains on the DIRECT INPUT
(RPT) screen, until you enter a new call sign.

TIP:
•• If the entered call sign has a duplicate in the repeater
list, the name is displayed.
(Only when the name has been entered.)
•• When directly entering the repeater call sign, including a
“/” at the beginning is also correct.

11-10
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

REPEATER DETAIL screen

Depending on the content, such as position data or The REPEATER DETAIL screen
UTC offset, the distance between your location and
Repeater Call sign Repeater type
the repeater or the repeater time can be displayed on
the REPEATER DETAIL screen. Repeater name
The detail screen can also be entered from the FROM Sub name
SELECT screen. Group number
Repeater frequency
Example: D isplaying the “Hirano” repeater detail Direction to the
screen. repeater*
1. Touch “TO” to select, and then touch “TO” again.
Repeater time Duplex setting
Distance to the
repeater

LLIf there is no position data, the distance and direction to

2. Touch “Gateway CQ.”
the repeater are not displayed. See page 11-5 to confirm
3. Touch “12: Japan.” your location.
4. Touch “Hirano” for 1 second. LLWhen selecting an FM repeater, the tone setting is
5. Touch “Detail.” displayed.
LLWhen selecting a DD repeater, the Gateway IP address is
displayed.
* When “POSITION” (p. 11-28) is set to “Approximate” on
the repeater list, the direction data is not displayed if the
distance to the repeater is less than 5 kilometers.

TIP: You can display the REPEATER DETAIL screen

when the DR screen is displayed. When you set the
•• Displays the REPEATER DETAIL screen. repeater as shown below, touch the repeater for 1
6. To close the REPEATER DETAIL screen, push second, and then touch “Repeater Detail.”
.

11-11
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Message operation
You can save up to 5 short messages in the DDTransmitting a message
transceiver’s memory to transmit in the DV mode. You can transmit a preset TX message by pushing
Each message can contain up to 20 characters. [PTT] in the DV mode. First, select a TX message
which also turns ON the Message Transmission
function.
DDEntering a TX message
Example: E ntering “JAPAN TOM” into TX message 1. Open the TX MESSAGE (DV) screen.
memory number 1. » SET > My Station > TX Message (DV)
1. Open the TX MESSAGE (DV) screen.
» SET > My Station > TX Message (DV) 2. Touch a TX message memory number.
2. Touch a TX message memory number for 1
second.

LLTo not transmit any message, touch “OFF.”

3. To close the TX MESSAGE screen, push .

LLInformation
•• The message is transmitted along with your voice signal.
3. Touch “Edit.” •• The message is transmitted each time you transmit.
•• When continuously transmitting, the selected TX
message is transmitted every 30 seconds.

DDDeleting a TX message
You can delete the TX messages.

Example: Deleting TX message “JAPAN TOM” from

4. Enter a message of up to 20 characters, then TX message memory number 1.
touch [ENT]. 1. Open the TX MESSAGE (DV) screen.
» SET > My Station > TX Message (DV)

2. Touch a TX message memory number for 1

second.

5. To close the TX MESSAGE screen, push .

3. Touch “Clear.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

4. Touch [YES].
•• Clears the entered message.
5. To close the TX MESSAGE screen, push .

11-12
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Viewing received call signs

When you receive a DV call, the calling station and 3. Touch [DETAIL].
the repeater call signs are saved. Up to 50 calls can •• Displays the RX history detail screen.
be saved. When you receive the 51st call, the oldest •• Rotate to select the page.
call history is deleted.
<1st page>
•• CALLER: Displays the caller station’s name*2 and
DDViewing the call signs on the RX History any note entered after the call sign.
•• CALLED: Displays the called station’s name*2.
screen � “CQCQCQ” is displayed when receiving
1. Open the RX HISTORY screen. a Local Area call or Gateway call.
» 2 > CD
2. Touch an RX history memory to view the details.
LLInformation
•• The RX history number, the caller’s name (or call
sign), destination, RX message, Received signal
mode, RX date and time, “GW,” and “GPS” are
displayed.
•• “GW” is displayed when a Gateway call is received.
<2nd page>
•• “GPS” is displayed when the received call includes
•• RXRPT1: Displays the repeater’s name*2 that was
position data.
accessed by the caller station. If the
•• “UP” is displayed when a repeater uplink signal is
received call was a Gateway call, this
received.
item displays the gateway call sign of the
•• Touch [RX>CS] to temporarily enter the received call
repeater you received the call from.
sign into “TO.”
•• RX RPT2: Displays the repeater’s name*2 you
•• In the QUICK MENU screen, you can select the
received the call from.
following options.
LLThe operating frequency is displayed instead of the
Call Sign Display: The received data is displayed in
above items when the call was not through a repeater
the Call Sign Display mode.
(Simplex call).
Name Display: The received data is displayed in

the Name Display mode.
Add to RPT List: Adds the repeater’s call sign to
the Repeater List.
Add to Your Memory: Adds the caller station’s call sign
to Your Call Sign.
Delete: Deletes the selected RX history.
Delete All: Deletes all RX histories.

RX HISTORY screen (RX01)

Caller station*2 Received signal mode
LA L note may be Displayed when a
displayed after “/.” RX message Gateway call is received.
History
number *1
Called
station Repeater name of
the called station
Received
date and time

D-PRS information
•• Compass direction
•• Distance
•• D-PRS symbol

*1 The icon differs, depending on the D-PRS TX format.

GPS: Position OBJ: Object
ITEM: Item WX: Weather
*2 When a name is not entered in the DV/DD Memory, the call sign
is displayed.
11-13
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Viewing received call signs

DD Viewing the call signs on the RX History screen

<3rd page> TIP: The “RX RPT1” setting may differ, depending
•• RX MESSAGE: D
 isplays any message included in on the way the call was made.
the received call, if entered.
•• RX TIME: Displays the date and time the call
was received.
Example 1: When a Local area call is received.
JM
1 JM1ZLK
call ZLK calling you...
ing
you
...

RXRPT2 RXRPT1
CALLER

CALLED ZLK .
JM1 g you..
callin

YOUR STATION

Example 2: When a Gateway call is received.

<4th, 5th page> JM
JP 1ZLK
1Y
IU callin RXRPT2
JM1ZLK calling from
JP1YIU node A

Displays position data of the caller station. If a

nod g fr
e A om

GW
received signal has no data, no position data is RXRPT1
INTERNET
displayed.
CALLED
g fro
m CALLER
callin A
ZLK e
JM1 IU nod
Y
JP1

YOUR STATION

4. To close the RX HISTORY screen, push .

TIP: To delete RX HISTORY data

On the RX HISTORY or the detail screen, push
, then touch “Delete” or “Delete All.”

11-14
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

BK mode communication
The Break-in (BK) function enables you to break into a conversation, where the 2 stations are communicating with
call sign squelch (DSQL) enabled.
LLThe BK function is automatically turned OFF when you turn OFF the transceiver.
LLThis function can be used in the DV or DD mode.

1. While 2 stations are communicating, touch 4. To close the DV/DD SET screen, push
for 1 second. several times.
•• After releasing , the calling station’s call sign or
the repeater’s call sign is set to “TO” (Destination).
•• Beeps sound, and the calling station’s call sign is
announced.
LLWhen a call sign is not received correctly, error beeps
sound, and no call sign is set. •• Returns to the standby screen, and “BK” is displayed.
2. Open the BK screen. 5. When both stations are in standby, hold down
» SET > DV/DD Set > BK [PTT] to transmit.
LL“BK” blinks when receiving a Break-in call.
3. Touch “ON.” LLTo cancel the BK mode, touch “OFF” in step 3, or turn
OFF the transceiver.

How to use Break-in?

While using the Digital Call Sign squelch (DSQL), the squelch never opens (no audio is heard) even if a call is
received, unless the call is addressed to your own call sign.
However, when a call including the “BK ON” signal (break-in call) is received, the squelch opens and audio is heard
even if the call is addressed to another station.

Station C calling to Station A with “BK OFF” Station C calling to Station A with “BK ON”

Station A Station A
and B are and B are
communicating communicating
using the using the
Digital Call Sign Station B Digital Call Sign Station B
Station A Station A
squelch. squelch.

Station C Station C
Station B does not hear that Station B also hears that
Station C is calling Station A. Station C is calling Station A.

11-15
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

EMR communication
The Enhanced Monitor Request (EMR) DDAdjusting the EMR AF level
communication function can be used in only the DV The audio output level, when an EMR signal is
mode. Using the EMR function, no call sign setting is received, is adjustable between 0 and 100%.
necessary. When an EMR signal is received, the audio is heard
at the preset level, or the control level,
LLInformation whichever is higher.
•• All transceivers that can receive an EMR signal To turn OFF the setting, set to “0.”
automatically open their digital squelch to receive the
signal. DO NOT use this function except in the case of 1. Open the “EMR AF Level” screen.
emergency. » SET > DV/DD Set > EMR AF Level
•• When an EMR signal is received, the audio (voice) is
heard at the set level, even if the volume setting level is 2. Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the EMR audio output
set to the minimum level. level between 0% (OFF) and 100% (maximum).
•• The EMR communication function is automatically turned (Default: 50%)
OFF when you turn OFF the transceiver.

Example: Transmitting from the “Hirano” repeater

using the EMR function.

1. Open the EMR screen.

» SET > DV/DD Set > EMR

1. Touch “ON.”
3. To close the “EMR AF Level” screen, push
several times.

2. To close the DV/DD SET screen, push

several times.

3. Returns to the standby screen, and “EMR” is

displayed.
4. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.
5. “EMR” blinks on a station that receives the EMR
signal. The audio (voice) is heard at the set
EMR AF Level, or the control level,
whichever is higher.
6. To cancel the EMR mode, touch “OFF” in step 2,
or turn OFF the transceiver.

11-16
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Automatic DV detection
If you receive an FM signal while in the DV mode, the 1. Open the “DV Auto Detect” screen.
“DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink to indicate the » SET > DV/DD Set > DV Auto Detect
received signal is FM.
When the DV Auto Detect function is ON, the 2. Touch “ON.”
transceiver automatically selects the FM mode to
temporarily monitor the signal. (Default: OFF)
LLRegardless of this setting, the “DV” and “FM” icons
alternately blink if you receive an FM signal while in the
DV mode.

NOTE: When Digital Call Sign squelch (DSQL)

or Digital Code squelch (CSQL) is selected, the
3. To close the DV/DD SET screen, push
transceiver does not receive FM signals, even if this
several times.
function is ON. You can silently wait for calls from LLWhen an FM signal is received while in the DV mode,
others. the “DV” and “FM” icons sequentially blink, and the
transceiver receives the signal in the FM mode.

When an FM signal is received while in the DV mode

DV Auto Detect function: OFF DV Auto Detect function: ON
The “DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink, but the The “DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink, and the
audio cannot be heard. audio can be heard.

The icons The icons Thanks for

alternately blink. … alternately blink. the nice QSO!

You cannot hear You can hear

the audio. the audio!

11-17
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Automatic Reply function

When a call addressed to your own call sign is Example: After receiving a call from “JM1ZLK,” beeps
received, the Automatic Reply function sounds beeps sound and the transceiver automatically
and automatically replies with your call sign. sends a reply call.
(Default: OFF)
Depending on the setting, a recorded message may
be transmitted with the call sign.

1. Open the “Auto Reply” screen.

» SET > DV/DD Set > Auto Reply The “TO” setting does not change, but “UR:
JM1ZLK (Caller’s call sign)” is displayed.
2. Touch an option.

NOTE: The Automatic Reply function temporarily

sets the received call sign to “TO” (destination).

TIP: To record the Auto Reply message

You can record the Auto Reply message. See page
11-19 for details.
» 2 > DV A-RPLY

•• ON: Automatically replies with your own call sign. (No

audio reply is sent)
•• Voice: Automatically replies with your call sign and an
Auto Reply message recorded on the SD card
(up to 10 seconds).
� If no card is inserted, or no message is
recorded, replies with only your own call
sign (No audio reply is sent).
3. To close the DV/DD SET screen, push
several times.

Auto Reply icon

•• Returns to the standby screen, and displays the Auto

Reply icon.
LLWhen “ON” or “Voice” is selected, the Automatic
Reply function is automatically turned OFF, when you
push [PTT].

11-18
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Automatic Reply function

DDRecording an Auto Reply message

You can record an Auto Reply message and save it on The “DV Auto Reply” screen
an SD card to reply to a call with your voice.
Adjust the Mic gain so that the “REC
NOTE: Confirm an SD card is in the card slot Level” meter reads less than 80%.

1. Open the “DV Auto Reply” screen.

» 2 > DV A-RPLY

2. Touch to start recording.

Touch to open the MIC GAIN adjustment

window.

•• Touch to stop recording.

•• Touch to playback the recorded message.
LLInformation
•• The maximum recording time is 10 seconds.
•• Hold the microphone 5 ~ 10 cm (2 ~ 4 inches) from TIP: How to clear the recorded content
your mouth, then speak at your normal voice level. Push on the “DV Auto Reply” screen, and
•• Touch [MIC GAIN] to open the MIC GAIN adjustment then touch “Clear” in the QUICK MENU screen.
window.
•• Only 1 message can be recorded. The current
contents are overwritten if you record again.
•• To close the “DV Auto Reply” screen, push .

11-19
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Automatic Reply function

DDWhen receiving position data

When you transmitted a call to a station and the
station automatically replies with its position data, the 1. You transmit to the station.
received position data is displayed in a window. JG3LUK

LLYou can turn OFF the caller’s position display.

» SET > Display > Reply Position Display Destination
Your station 2. The position data is
automatically transmitted.

3. R
 eceived position data is
displayed.

11-20
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Data communication
In addition to digital voice communication, you can DDData communication application setting
send and receive data. Also, you can use the DV Fast Set the communication software, as shown below.
Data function for data communication. •• Port: The COM port number that is used by the
To send and receive data, a USB cable (user IC-905.*
supplied), and a data communication software (user •• Baud rate: Your desired speed
supplied) are required. •• Data: 8 bit
•• Parity: none
•• Stop: 1 bit
NOTE: “DV Data TX” is set to “Auto” as the •• Flow control: Xon/Xoff
default setting. When you enter text data into your * Depending on the PC environment, the COM port number
communication software, the transceiver may used by the IC-905 may be higher than 5. In that case, use
automatically transmit it, depending on the software an application that can set it to higher than 5.
and the software settings.
» SET > DV/DD Set > DV Data TX
DDSending data
1. Set your own call sign, the destination call sign,
and the repeater call sign.
DDConnection 2. Follow the instructions of your data
Connect the transceiver to your PC using a USB communication application software.
cable, as shown below. 3. When you enter text data into your communication
software, the transceiver may automatically
PC transmit it, depending on the software and its
settings.
USB cable LLWhen “DV Data TX” is set to “PTT,” pushing [PTT]
transmits the text data and a voice signal.
» SET > DV/DD Set > DV Data TX
To a USB port
To the [USB] port IC-905 LLBefore transmitting the data, the transceiver
sends a carrier sense signal for approximately 500
milliseconds.

NOTE: Before you start sending data, BE SURE to NOTE:

set the following items on the USB (B) FUNCTION •• Only ASCII code can be used for data communication.
screen. •• The transceiver also has a Message Transmission
» SET > Connectors > USB (B) Function function that transmits up to 20 characters. (p. 11-12)
•• Depending on the combination of your PC and your
•• Set “USB (B) Function” to “DV Data.”
communication software, some data may be lost.
•• Set “GPS Out” to “OFF.”
•• While receiving voice or data through the Internet,
some packets may be lost due to network error (poor
data throughput performance). In such a case, an “L” is
displayed on the screen to indicate that packet loss has
occurred.

11-21
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Data communication

DDDV Fast Data function

To send data using the DV Fast Data function, follow
the instructions below.
DV Fast Data communication can be made on only
the following Icom transceivers: (As of March 2023)
•• IC-705
•• IC-905
•• IC-9700
•• ID-31A/E PLUS
•• ID-4100A/E
•• ID-5100A/E*
•• ID-52A/E
•• ID-51A/E (PLUS, PLUS2, 50th Anniversary model)
* Usable only when firmware versions
CPU M 1.10, S 1.00, C 1.10, and DSP 1.10 or later are
installed.

1. Open the DV FAST DATA screen.

» SET > DV/DD Set > DV Fast Data

2. Touch “Fast Data.”

3. Touch “ON.”

4. To close the DV FAST DATA screen, push

several times.

11-22
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Digital squelch functions

The digital squelch opens only when you receive a DDThe Digital Code Squelch setting
signal addressed to your own call sign, or a signal that 1. Push .
includes a matching digital code. •• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
You can silently wait for calls from others. 2. Touch [D.SQL] several times to select “CSQL.”
You can independently set the Digital squelch function
in the VFO mode, Memory mode, Call channel mode,
or DR function.

DDThe Digital Call Sign squelch setting

1. Push .
•• Opens the FUNCTION screen.
2. Touch [D.SQL] several times to select “DSQL.”
LLTouching [D.SQL] selects “DSQL,” “CSQL,” or “OFF.”
3. Touch [D.SQL] for 1 second.
4. Rotate to select a digital code.

“CSQL” is
displayed.

LLTouching [D.SQL] selects “DSQL,” “CSQL,” or “OFF.”

3. Push to close the FUNCTION screen.
•• Range: 00 ~ 99
“DSQL” is LLTouch [DEF] for 1 second to return the value to the
displayed. default.

•• When the received signal includes a matching call NOTE: Even if the squelch is closed by the Digital
sign, the squelch opens and you can hear the audio. Code Squelch function, you can receive data in the
LLWhen the received signal does not include a
DV mode.
matching call sign, the digital call sign squelch does
not open. However, the S/RF meter displays the
received signal level.

NOTE:
•• DO NOT use the Digital Call Sign Squelch function
when communicating with 2 or more stations, because
the function opens only when receiving a signal
addressed to your own call sign. Therefore the function
can be used when communicating with only 1 station.
•• Even if the squelch is closed by the Digital Call Sign
Squelch function, you can receive data in the DV mode.

11-23
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Repeater list
You can save repeater information for quick and TIP:
simple communication in up to 2500 repeaters •• For easy operation, the repeater list is preloaded into
(repeater list) in up to 50 Groups. your transceiver. However, if you do an All Reset, the
Data must be in the repeater list to use the DR CPU deletes all setting data, the Memory channels, and
function. You can add and edit repeater content and the repeater list. We recommend that you back up the
groups in the repeater list. memory data to an SD card or save it to a PC using
the CS-905 programming software.
You can enter 6 types of frequencies into the repeater •• The repeater list can be downloaded from the Icom
website.
list, as shown below:
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/
•• DV Repeater
•• DV Simplex
•• FM Repeater
•• FM Simplex
•• DD Repeater
•• DD Simplex

DDRepeater list contents

The following contents are included in the repeater Example: “Hirano” repeater information
list:
See page 11-25 for details.
•• TYPE: Communication type
•• NAME: Repeater name
•• SUB NAME: Repeater sub name
•• CALL SIGN: Repeater call sign and port letter
•• GW CALL SIGN: Gateway repeater’s call sign and
port “G”
•• GW IP ADDRESS: Gateway IP address
•• GROUP: Repeater group
•• USE (FROM): Access repeater use
•• FREQUENCY: Access repeater’s frequency
•• DUP: Duplex direction
•• OFFSET FREQ: Frequency offset
•• TONE: Tone setting
•• REPEATER TONE: Repeater tone
•• POSITION: Position data accuracy level
•• LATITUDE: Latitude of the repeater
•• LONGITUDE: Longitude of the repeater
•• UTC OFFSET: UTC Offset

11-24
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

This section describes how to manually enter new
repeater information into the repeater list.
The required setting items differ, depending on your
communication usage. Confirm the required items, as
shown below.

NOTE: To enter repeater information into the

repeater list, the repeater’s call sign must be entered
first.

DDRequired items for the communication cases

Repeater list Used as an access Used as a destination Used as an
Simplex (FROM)
contents repeater repeater FM repeater
DV DD DV DD FM
TYPE DV Simplex DD Simplex FM Simplex
Repeater Repeater Repeater Repeater Repeater
NAME        
SUB NAME        
CALL SIGN      N/A N/A N/A

GW CALL SIGN    N/A N/A N/A N/A
(For a Gateway call)

GW IP ADDRESS N/A  N/A  N/A N/A N/A N/A

GROUP        
USE(FROM)        
FREQUENCY        
DUP  N/A  N/A  N/A N/A N/A
OFFSET FREQ  N/A  N/A  N/A N/A N/A
TONE N/A N/A N/A N/A  N/A N/A 
REPEATER TONE N/A N/A N/A N/A  N/A N/A 
POSITION        
LATITUDE        
LONGITUDE        
UTC OFFSET        

: Must be entered
: Can be entered
N/A: Not Applicable

11-25
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DDEntering new information into the repeater list

Step 1. Selecting the repeater group Step 2. Selecting the communication type
1. Open the DV/DD MEMORY screen. 1. Touch “TYPE.”
» 2 > DV/DD MEMORY 2. Touch the communication type.
•• DV Repeater: Repeater operation in the DV mode.
•• DV Simplex: Simplex operation in the DV mode.
•• FM Repeater: Repeater operation in the FM mode.
•• FM Simplex: Simplex operation in the FM mode.
•• DD Repeater: Repeater operation in the DD mode.
•• DD Simplex: Simplex operation in the DD mode.

Step 3. Entering the repeater name

1. Touch “NAME.”
2. Touch “Repeater List.”
2. Enter a name of up to 16 characters.
3. After entering, touch [ENT].

Step 4. Entering the repeater sub name

1. Touch “SUB NAME.”
2. Enter a sub name of up to 8 characters.
3. After entering, touch [ENT].

3. Touch a repeater group to add a repeater to.

(Example: 12: Japan) Step 5. Entering the repeater call sign
LLWhen Step 2. Selecting the communication type is set
to “DV Simplex,” “FM Simplex,” or “DD Simplex,” go to
Step 8. Changing the repeater group.

1. Touch “CALL SIGN.”

2. Enter the repeater call sign of up to 8 characters,
including spaces and the node letter.
NOTE: BE SURE to add the repeater node letter in
the 8th digit of the call sign, according to the frequency
•• Displays the repeater list of the selected repeater band shown below. Note that there are almost always
group. different node letters between Japanese D-STAR
4. Push . repeaters and repeaters in other countries.
Cross band operation between different nodes at the
5. Touch “Add.”
same repeater site can be made.
•• 1200 MHz: A (B in Japan)
•• 430 MHz: B (A in Japan)
•• 144 MHz: C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan)

3. After entering, touch [ENT].

•• The REPEATER LIST EDIT screen is displayed.

11-26
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DD Entering new information into the repeater list

Step 6. Entering the gateway repeater call sign Step 11. Selecting the Duplex direction
LLThis item is displayed when Step 2. Selecting the LLThis item is displayed when Step 2. Selecting the
communication type is set to “DV Repeater” or “DD communication type is set to “DV Repeater” or “FM
Repeater.” Repeater.”
LLThe 8th digit in the call sign, entered in Step 5. Entering LL“DUP–” is automatically set when the access repeater
the repeater call sign is automatically set to “G” as the frequency is entered in Step 10. Entering the access
gateway port, so you can skip this setting and go to the repeater frequency. If necessary, you can change the
next item. Duplex direction.

1. Touch “GW CALL SIGN.” 1. Touch “DUP.”

2. Enter a gateway repeater call sign of up to 8 2. Touch a Duplex direction.
characters, including spaces. •• OFF: Turn the duplex function OFF.
•• Only a space or “G” can be entered in the 8th digit. •• DUP–: The transmit frequency shifts down from the
3. After entering, touch [ENT]. receive frequency by the offset amount.
•• DUP+: The transmit frequency shifts up from the
receive frequency by the offset amount.
Step 7. Entering the Gateway IP address
LLThis item is displayed when Step 2. Selecting the
communication type is set to “DD Repeater.”
Step 12. Entering the frequency offset
LLThis item is displayed when Step 2. Selecting the
1. Touch “GW IP ADDRESS.” communication type is set to “DV Repeater” or “FM
Repeater.”
2. Enter the IP address.
LLThe offset value* is automatically set when the access
•• Range: 0.0.0.1 ~ 255.255.255.254
repeater frequency is entered in Step 10. Entering
3. After entering, touch [ENT]. the access repeater frequency. If necessary, you can
change the frequency offset.
Step 8. Changing the repeater group * The default value differs, depending on the transceiver
version.
LLThe repeater group that is selected in Step 1. Selecting
the repeater group is displayed. You can skip this setting
and go to the next item. To change the group, follow the 1. Touch “OFFSET FREQ.”
steps, described below. 2. Enter the frequency offset.
•• Range: 0.000.00 ~ 99.999.9 MHz
1. Touch “GROUP.” 3. After entering, touch [ENT].
2. Touch the repeater group. (01 ~ 50)
Step 13. Setting the tone
Step 9. S
 etting “USE(FROM)” to be used as an LLThis item is displayed when Step 2. Selecting the
access repeater communication type is set to “FM Repeater” or “FM
Simplex.”
LLYou can use the entered repeaters as an access
repeater when using the DR function. When not using
as an access repeater, select “NO,” and go to Step 15. 1. Touch “TONE.”
Selecting the position data accuracy level. In that 2. Touch an option.
case, the entered repeater is not displayed in “FROM” on •• OFF: Turn OFF the Tone function.
the DR screen. •• TONE: Select when the repeater requires an access
tone.
•• TSQL: Select when you want to use the tone squelch
1. Touch “USE(FROM).”
in simplex operation.
2. Touch “YES” to use the repeater as an access
repeater.

Step 10. Entering the access repeater frequency

1. Touch “FREQUENCY.”
2. Enter the repeater frequency.
3. After entering, touch [ENT].

11-27
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DD Entering new information into the repeater list

Step 14. Selecting the repeater tone frequency Step 18. Setting the UTC offset
LLThis item is displayed when Step 2. Selecting the LLUniversal Time Coordinated (UTC) offset is the time
communication type is set to “FM Repeater” or “FM difference between UTC and repeater local time. This is
Simplex.” a useful function to know the local time of the destination
LLThis setting is required when Step 13. Setting the tone repeater before you make a call.
is set to “TONE” or “TSQL.”
1. Touch “UTC OFFSET.”
1. Touch “REPEATER TONE.” 2. Set the time difference between UTC and the
2. Set the repeater tone frequency. local time.
3. Push . 3. Push .

Step 15. Selecting the position data accuracy level Step 19. Saving the repeater list
LLWhen the Near Repeater Search function is not used, or 1. Touch “<<Add Write>>.”
the distance between your position and a repeater is not •• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
needed, select “None,” and go to Step 18. Setting the 2. Touch [YES].
UTC offset. •• The entered contents are saved in the repeater list,
and the display returns to the selected repeater group
1. Touch “POSITION.” screen.
2. Touch the position data accuracy level.
•• None: Select when the repeater has no
position data. TIP: How to cancel the entered data
•• Approximate: Select when the entered position data 1. Push .
is approximately correct. •• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
•• Exact: Select when the entered position data 2. Touch [YES].
is exactly correct.

Step 16. Entering the latitude

LLThis item is displayed only when Step 15. Selecting the
position data accuracy level is set to “Approximate” or
“Exact.”

1. Touch “LATITUDE.”
2. Enter the latitude. •• Cancels the entry and returns to the selected
LLTouching [N/S] selects a north latitude (N) or a south repeater group screen.
latitude (S).
3. After entering, touch [ENT].

Step 17. Entering the longitude

LLThis item is displayed only when Step 15. Selecting the
position data accuracy level is set to “Approximate” or
“Exact.”

1. Touch “LONGITUDE.”
2. Enter the longitude.
LLTouching [E/W] selects an east longitude (E) or a
west longitude (W).
3. After entering, touch [ENT].

11-28
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DDEditing repeater data

You can edit repeater data. This is useful when
already-entered data is incorrect, has changed, or
some data needs to be added to the list.

1. Open the REPEATER GROUP screen. 7. Touch [YES].

» 2 > DV/DD MEMORY > Repeater List

2. Touch a repeater group where the repeater you

want to edit is listed. (Example: 12: Japan)

•• The edited contents are saved into the repeater list,

and returns to the selected repeater group screen.
8. To close the Repeater List screen, push
several times.
3. Touch a repeater that you want to edit for 1
second. (Example: Hirano) NOTE: The currently selected repeater on the DR
screen cannot be edited. To edit the repeater, select
another repeater on the DR screen.

4. Touch “Edit.”

•• The REPEATER LIST EDIT screen is displayed.

5. Touch an item, then edit it.
LLSee pages 11-26 ~ 11-28 for details.
6. After editing, touch “<<Overwrite>>.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

11-29
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DDDeleting repeater data

1. Open the REPEATER GROUP screen. NOTE: The currently selected repeater on the DR
» 2 > DV/DD MEMORY > Repeater List screen cannot be deleted. To delete the repeater,
select another repeater on the DR screen.
2. Touch a repeater group where the repeater you
want to delete is listed. (Example: 12: Japan)

3. Touch a repeater that you want to delete for 1

second. (Example: Hirano)

4. Touch “Delete.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

5. Touch [YES].

•• The selected repeater contents are deleted from the

repeater list, and returns to the selected repeater
group screen.
6. To close the Repeater List screen, push
several times.

11-30
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DDRearranging the display order of the DDAdding new repeater information from
repeaters RX History
You can move the entered repeaters to rearrange their 1. Open the RX HISTORY screen.
display order in the selected repeater group. » 2 > CD

1. Open the REPEATER GROUP screen. 2. Rotate to display the repeater you want
» 2 > DV/DD MEMORY > Repeater List to add to the repeater list.

2. Touch a repeater group where the repeater you

want to move is listed. (Example: 12: Japan)

3. Touch [DETAIL].
4. Rotate to display “RXRPT1” and
“RXRPT2.”
3. Touch a repeater that you want to move for 1
second. (Example: Hirano)

5. Push .
6. Touch “Add To Repeater List.”
4. Touch “Move.”

7. Touch the repeater call sign that you want to add

5. Touch a repeater to insert the repeater you want to the repeater list.
to move above it.
Blinks

•• Displays the REPEATER LIST EDIT screen. The

•• The selected repeater is inserted above the selected repeater call sign is automatically entered.
destination repeater name. LLSee pages 11-26 ~ 11-28 to edit the contents.
LLIf you touch “<<Move End>>,” the repeater is moved 8. Touch “<<Add Write>>.”
to the bottom of the group. •• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
6. To close the Repeater List screen, push 9. Touch [YES].
several times. •• The repeater contents are added to the repeater list,
and the display returns to the RX HISTORY screen.

11-31
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DDSkip setting for the DR scan

You can set repeaters as scan skip repeaters. The selected repeaters are skipped for faster scanning.
You can set the skip setting to all repeaters in the selected repeater group, or to individual repeaters.
LLWhen a repeater is set as a skip repeater, its “USE (FROM)” setting is automatically set to “NO.” In that case, the repeater
cannot be selected in “FROM” (Access repeater) on the DR screen.

Individual skip setting Group skip setting

1. Open the REPEATER GROUP screen. On the REPEATER GROUP screen, push ,
» 2 > DV/DD MEMORY > Repeater List then touch “SKIP All ON” to skip the repeaters in the
group during the DR scan.
2. Touch a repeater group where the repeater you
set the skip setting is listed.
(Example: 12: Japan)

LLTo cancel the skip settings in the group, touch “SKIP All
OFF.”

3. Touch a repeater that you want to skip for 1

second. (Example: Hirano) TIP:
•• When you select “Repeater List” on the FROM SELECT
screen, you can set the skip setting as described to the
left.

4. Touch “SKIP.”

•• When “FROM” is selected on the DR screen, push

, then touch “SKIP” to set the skip setting, as
shown below.

•• Displays “SKIP” in the upper right corner.

LLTo cancel the skip setting, touch “SKIP” again.
LLTo set the skip setting to all repeaters in the group,
touch “SKIP All ON.”
5. To close the Repeater List screen, push
several times.

11-32
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Entering new information into the repeater list

DDEntering or editing a repeater group name

1. Open the REPEATER GROUP screen.
» 2 > DV/DD MEMORY > Repeater List

2. Touch a repeater group that you edit the name for

1 second.

3. Touch “Edit Name.”

4. Enter a group name of up to 16 characters, and

then touch [ENT].

5. To close the REPEATER GROUP screen, push

several times.

11-33
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Your Call Sign

DDEntering a Your Call Sign
You can manually enter a Your (destination) Call Sign. 8. Touch “<<Add Write>>.”
When a Your Call Sign is set to “TO,” you can make a
call to the station, even if you do not know where the
station is currently located.
Up to 300 “Your Call Signs” can be entered.

Example: E
 ntering “Rick/JM1ZLK” to the Your Call
Sign memory.

1. Open the YOUR CALL SIGN screen. •• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
» 2 > DV/DD MEMORY > Your Call Sign 9. Touch [YES].
2. Push .
3. Touch “Add.”

4. Touch “NAME.”
10. To close the YOUR CALL SIGN screen, push
several times.

TIP:
To cancel the entered call sign
Push , then the “Cancel edit?” window is
displayed. Touch [YES] to cancel the entry and
5. Enter a station name of up to 16 characters, and return to the YOUR CALL SIGN screen.
then touch [ENT].

To edit the entered call sign

6. Touch “CALL SIGN.” Touch “Edit” in step 3.

7. Enter a call sign of up to 8 characters, including

spaces, and then touch [ENT].

11-34
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Your Call Sign

DDDeleting Your Call Sign DDRearranging the display order of Your

Call Signs
1. Open the YOUR CALL SIGN screen. You can move Your Call Signs to rearrange their display
» 2 > DV/DD MEMORY > Your Call Sign order. If the stations you often communicate with are
2. Touch a call sign that you want to delete for 1 moved to the top of the list, it is easy to find them.
second. Example: Moving “Rick” above “Eddy.”
1. Open the YOUR CALL SIGN screen.
» 2 > DV/DD MEMORY > Your Call Sign

2. Touch a call sign that you want to move for 1

second.

3. Touch “Delete.”

3. Touch “Move.”

•• The confirmation dialog is displayed.

4. Touch [YES].

4. Touch the position to insert the Your Call Sign you

want to move the call sign above.
Blinks

•• The selected call sign is deleted from the Your Call

Sign list, and the returns to the YOUR CALL SIGN
screen.
5. To close the YOUR CALL SIGN screen, push
several times.

NOTE: The currently selected Your Call Sign on the

DR screen cannot be edited or deleted. To edit or
delete the Your Call Sign, select another Your Call
Sign on the DR screen.

•• While moving, “DESTINATION” blinks.

•• The selected call sign is inserted above the
destination call sign.
LLIf you touch “<<Move End>>,” the Your Call Sign is
moved to the bottom of the group.
5. To close the YOUR CALL SIGN screen, push
several times.

11-35
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Manually setting Call Signs

Set or view the “UR,” “R1,” “R2,” and “MY” call signs Step 2. Gateway “R2” setting
to use in the DV or DD mode. 1. Touch “R2.”
» 2 > CS LLTo manually enter a call sign, touch “R2” for 1
second, then touch “Edit.”
2. Touch “GW.”
When not using the DR function, sets the call signs on
this screen. About the RPT2 SELECT screen
NOT USED* For local area calls
For Simplex operation (DV mode/DD mode)
You can set the “UR” and “MY” call signs. To select the gateway call sign from the
GW
repeater list.
For Duplex (repeater) operation Repeater name
To select the repeater that has the
(DV mode/DD mode/DR function) same gateway as the “R1” repeater.
You can set only the “MY” call sign when the DR
function is ON.

Step 3. Destination “UR” setting

<To manually set the Duplex (repeater) operation> 1. Touch “UR.”
LLTo manually enter a call sign, touch “UR” for 1
Example: M
 aking a gateway CQ call to Kirkland second, then touch “Edit.”
repeater (N71H B) from the Hirano repeater 2. Touch “Gateway CQ.”
(JP3YHH A), in the DV mode. 3. Touch repeater group where your destination
repeater is listed.
Destination call sign 4. Touch a destination repeater.

Repeater call sign About the YOUR SELECT screen

To select “CQCQCQ” to make a non-
Gateway repeater call sign CQCQCQ
call sign specific call.
Your own (MY) call sign To select “Gateway CQ” to make a call
Gateway CQ*
using the repeater list.
LLBefore starting to set the call sign, set the frequency of To select the destination “UR” call sign
your access repeater and duplex direction on the standby Your Call Sign
using the Your Call Sign memory.
screen.
To select the destination “UR” call sign
RX History
using RX History.
TIP: When the Digital Repeater Set function is ON, To select the destination “UR” call sign
the repeater call sign is automatically set. TX History
using TX History.
» SET > DV/DD Set > Digital Repeater Set
* Not displayed in the Simplex mode.

Step 1. Setting the call sign “R1”

1. Touch “R1” for 1 second.
2. Touch “Edit.”
3. Enter the repeater call sign of up to 8 characters,
including spaces. (Example: JP3YHH A)
4. Touch [ENT].
•• Sets the entered repeater call sign.

11-36
11 D-STAR OPERATION (ADVANCED)

Are your settings correct?

If you make a Local Area call with a gateway repeater still selected in “TO,” the destination repeater will be busy
while you transmit. The stations that want to use that repeater as their access repeater cannot access it, as shown
below.

BE SURE to set CQCQCQ in “TO” on the DR screen when you intend to make a Local Area call, or after you finish
a Gateway call.

Example: J A3YUA wants to make a Local Area call.

Hirano repeater Kirkland repeater
This is JA3YUA through
JP3YHH node A for a local call His setting is wrong!
I can’t access the repeater!

INTERNET
This
JP3 is JA3Y
Y
gh for a HH no UA thro
u loca de A ugh
hro
At l ca
ll
YU
J A3 de A
s no 
is i
Th YHH l call
3 a
JP a loc
for

Hirano area Kirkland area

JA3YUA’s setting NOTE: With this setting, you can make a Local Area
call, but the destination Repeater, selected in “TO,”
is also busy while you transmit.
The stations that want to use that repeater as their
access repeater cannot access it.

The destination (“TO”) setting is incorrect.

Correct setting

To make a Local Area call, set the destination (“TO”)

to “CQCQCQ.” See page 11-8 for details.

11-37
Section 12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION
About the DV Gateway function�����������������������������������������������������������������12-2
When using the External Gateway function�����������������������������������������������12-3
About the Terminal and Access Point (AP) Call sign����������������������������������12-4
DD When operating in the Terminal mode�������������������������������������������������������������12-4
DD When operating in the AP mode����������������������������������������������������������������������12-4
Setting up a network�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������12-5
DD When connecting your device to the Internet using a router���������������������������12-7
DD When connecting your device to the Internet using a cellular system�������������12-9
DD When connecting your device to the Internet using a mobile router�������������12-10
Setting up the device�������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-11
DD When using the Internal Gateway function����������������������������������������������������12-11
DD When using the RS-MS3W software�������������������������������������������������������������12-13
DD When using the RS-MS3A�����������������������������������������������������������������������������12-14
Terminal mode operation��������������������������������������������������������������������������12-15
DD Setting the Terminal mode�����������������������������������������������������������������������������12-15
DD Operating in the Terminal mode��������������������������������������������������������������������12-16
Access Point mode operation�������������������������������������������������������������������12-17
DD Setting the Access Point mode����������������������������������������������������������������������12-17
DD Making a Gateway call through the Access Point transceiver�����������������������12-18
Troubleshooting����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12-22
DD Error icons of the transceiver������������������������������������������������������������������������12-22
DD Troubleshooting for the Terminal mode operation�����������������������������������������12-23
DD Troubleshooting for the Access Point mode operation����������������������������������12-25
DD Error messages of the RS-MS3W and the RS-MS3A�����������������������������������12-27

12-1
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

About the DV Gateway function

Even if you cannot access a D-STAR repeater, you can make Gateway calls with the DV Gateway function. The
function has two modes, the Terminal mode and the Access Point mode.
LLOther stations can also directly communicate using the DV Gateway function, only if they use call sign routing.
LLWhen using the DV Gateway function, you cannot make a direct Local Area call.

IMPORTANT:
•• Before operating in the Terminal mode or the Access Point mode, BE SURE to check your local regulations or laws.
•• Register your call sign (MY) at a gateway server.*
•• Register the Terminal/AP call sign that is set in the transceiver, RS-MS3A, or RS-MS3W to the RS-RP3C gateway control
software as the access point.*
* Ask the gateway repeater administrator for details.

Terminal mode Connect to the [LAN] port

The Terminal mode enables you to make Gateway Other station
calls through the Internet.
In the Terminal mode, the transceiver does not INTERNET
transmit or receive RF signals through the antenna.
IC-905
D-STAR
repeater

Access Point mode Remote D-STAR transceiver*2

The Access Point mode enables you to use another
D-STAR transceiver and remotely*1 make Gateway
Connect to the [LAN] port
calls through an Access Point transceiver.
Other station

INTERNET

IC-905
Access Point D-STAR
repeater

*1 Within the transmit and receive range of the Access Point transceiver. The range will vary, depending on the operating
environment.
*2 Any model as long as the transceiver is D-STAR capable. Only one D-STAR transceiver can access the Access Point at the
same time.

NOTE: When using the DV Gateway function

•• When operating in the Access Point mode, you need two call signs. One for the Access Point transceiver and one for the
Remote D-STAR transceiver. (p. 12-4)
•• You need an Internet connection with an IPv4 Global IP address. If you use a cellular system, you need an IPv4 Global IP
address assigned to your Windows or Android device.
•• When you use your Windows or Android device, read the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A instruction manual in addition to this
document. They can be downloaded from the Icom website. (pp. 12-13, 12-14)

12-2
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

When using the External Gateway function

Even if you cannot connect the transceiver to the Internet directly, or you want to use a cellular system, you can
use the DV Gateway function by using a Windows or Android device that is running the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A
application software.
LLTo connect the transceiver to your device, you need a USB cable (User supplied).

Terminal mode Set “Gateway Select” to “External Gateway”

1. Open the “Gateway Select” screen.
» 2 > DV GW > Gateway Select
USB cable Other station 2. Touch “External Gateway (USB (B)).”

INTERNET

IC-905 Windows or
Android device D-STAR
repeater

Access Point mode

Remote D-STAR transceiver*

USB cable Other station

INTERNET

IC-905 Windows or
Android device D-STAR
repeater
Access Point

* Any model as long as the transceiver is D-STAR capable.

Only one D-STAR transceiver can access the Access Point
at the same time.

12-3
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

About the Terminal and Access Point (AP) Call sign

DDWhen operating in the Terminal mode DDWhen operating in the AP mode
IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT:
•• Register your call sign (MY) at a gateway server.* •• Register your call sign (MY) at a gateway server.*
•• Register the Terminal/AP call sign that is set in the •• Register the Terminal/AP call sign that is set in the
transceiver, RS-MS3A, or RS-MS3W application transceiver, RS-MS3A, or RS-MS3W application
software to the RS-RP3C repeater gateway software as software to the RS-RP3C repeater gateway software as
the access point.* the access point.*
* Ask the gateway repeater administrator for details. * Ask the gateway repeater administrator for details.

LLInformation LLInformation
•• The Terminal/AP Call sign should be 8 characters long. •• The Terminal/AP Call sign should be 8 characters long.
Enter spaces between MY call sign and the 8th character. Enter spaces between Access Point (AP) transceiver’s
•• Enter a unique ID suffix between A to Z, except for G, I, MY call sign and the 8th character.
and S, at the end of MY Call Sign for the 8th character. •• Enter a unique ID suffix between A to Z, except for G, I,
•• Call signs shown below are just examples. and S, at the end of MY Call Sign for the 8th character.
•• Call signs shown below are just examples.

When using the Internal Gateway function When using the Internal Gateway function
Enter the Terminal Call sign in “Terminal/AP Call sign” Enter the AP Call sign in “Terminal/AP Call sign” in the
in the transceiver. (p. 12-11) transceiver. (p. 12-11)
» 2 > DV GW > Internal Gateway Settings > » 2 > DV GW > Internal Gateway Settings >
Terminal/AP Call sign Terminal/AP Call sign

Other
station Access Point Other
INTERNET station

IC-905 INTERNET
D-STAR
MY Call Sign: repeater IC-905
JA3YUA D-STAR
MY Call Sign:
Terminal/AP Call sign: JA3YUA repeater
JA3YUA A
Terminal/AP Call sign:
JA3YUA A

When using the External Gateway function When using the External Gateway function
Enter the Terminal Call sign in “Terminal/AP Call sign” Enter the AP Call sign in “Terminal/AP Call sign” in the
in the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A. RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A.

Other
station Access Point Other
station
INTERNET

IC-905 Windows or
INTERNET
MY Call Sign: D-STAR
Android device repeater IC-905 Windows or
JA3YUA
Enter “JA3YUA A” in MY Call Sign: Android device D-STAR
“Terminal/AP Call sign” in JA3YUA repeater
Enter “JA3YUA A” in
the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A.
“Terminal/AP Call sign” in
the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A.

12-4
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up a network
Before using the DV Gateway function, you have to NOTE: Depending on your contract, you may be
set up a network. charged a large or additional communication fee.
Ask your Internet service provider about the content
of your contract.

When using the Internal Gateway function

1. When connecting your transceiver to the Internet
using a router (p. 12-7)

When using the External Gateway function

1. When connecting your device*1 to the Internet
using a router (p. 12-7)
2. When connecting your device*1 to the Internet
using a cellular system (p. 12-9)
3. When connecting your device*1 to the Internet
using a mobile router (p. 12-10)

*1 Windows or Android device

INTERNET

*2

12-5
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up a network

About the UDP Hole Punch function

When both the caller station and the called station use the Terminal or Access Point mode, the caller station does
not need to:
•• Forward port 40000 when connecting to the Internet using the router.
•• Use a device assigned a static or dynamic Global IP address.
CQ CQ CQ,
this is JA3YUA� CQ
this CQ C
is J Q,
A3
YU
INTERNET A�

No need to Forward
forward port 40000. port 40000.
Called
, �
Caller UA 1ZLK JA3YUA,
3Y
JA is JM this is JM1ZLK�
this

LLInformation
•• Depending on your Network environment, you may not be able to use this function.
•• The caller station must set “UDP Hole Punch” to “ON” in the IC-905 (When using the Internal Gateway function) or RS-
MS3W/RS-MS3A (When using the External Gateway function) to use this function.
» 2 > DV GW > Internal Gateway Settings > UDP Hole Punch
When not using this function, set “UDP Hole Punch” to “OFF.”
•• A few minutes* after the call, the caller station cannot receive from the called station. In this case, the caller station must
transmit to the called station again.
* Less than 3 minutes, depending on the router.

NOTE:
•• When using the External Gateway function, use version 1.30 or later of the RS-MS3W/RS-MS3A application software.
•• The caller station cannot communicate with the called station when:
- The caller station is using an earlier version software or firmware.
- The called station using an earlier version software or firmware.
- The called station calls through a local repeater instead of using the Terminal or Access Point mode.
•• Even if using the latest version, the called station needs to forward port 40000 when connecting to the Internet using a
router, or to use a device assigned a static or dynamic Global IP address to communicate with the caller station.

INTERNET

Not forwarding Forwarding

port 40000 port 40000
Caller
CQ CQ CQ,
Called this is JM1ZLK�

12-6
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up a network

DDWhen connecting your device to the Internet using a router

The following items are needed to use the DV
Gateway function.
INTERNET
•• An Internet connection with an IPv4 Global IP address *2
•• A static*1 local IP address set to your transceiver, *1
Windows, or Android device
•• Port forwarding of port 40000
*2
USB cable
*1
*2
*1 A static IP address to the transceiver, Windows, or
Android device is recommended.
*2 Needs a Global IP address and forwarding port number USB cable
40000. *1

1. A Global IP address
A static or dynamic IPv4 Global IP address assigned to the router is needed.
LLYour router may not have a Global IP address, depending on your Internet service provider.
Ask your Internet service provider about the Global IP address setting.

2. Setting a static local IP address

When using a router, you need to set a static local IP address to the transceiver, Windows, or Android device.
LLUsable IP addresses differ, depending on your router. Ask the router’s manufacturer for details.
LLDo not set the same IP address to two or more devices that are connected to the same router.
LLAsk your Windows or Android device’s manufacturer about the setting details.

Transceiver setting
When using the Internal Gateway function, set these items.
» SET > Network
Items Contents
DHCP ON (Default)  OFF
IP Address An IP address that is not assigned to any other device.
Example: 192.168.0.10 (Default)
Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the IP address
Example: 255.255.255.0 (Default)
LLNormally, use the default value.
Default Gateway An IP address of the LAN side on the router
Example: 192.168.0.1
Primary DNS Server An IP address of the DNS Server.
LLNormally, enter the default gateway IP address.
Example: 192.168.0.1
2nd DNS Server An IP address of the secondary DNS Server.
LLEnter this item if necessary.

12-7
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up a network

DD When connecting your device to the Internet using a router

INTERNET
*1 *2

*2
USB cable
*1
*2
*1 A static IP address to the transceiver, Windows, or
Android device is recommended.
*2 Needs a Global IP address and forwarding port number USB cable
40000. *1

3. Port forwarding
When using a router, enable communication with the Internet, as described below.
•• Forward the port number 40000 to the transceiver, Windows, or Android device.
•• “UDP” should be used as the port protocol.
•• Set a static local IP address in Procedure 2 (2. Setting a static local IP address) as a destination port.
LLCheck the router’s manual about how to forward the port.
LLOnly one transceiver, Windows, or Android device connected to the router can use the DV Gateway function at the same
time.
LLDepending on the router settings, you must configure the IP filter settings. Check the router’s manual on how to configure the
settings.

 When using the Internal Gateway function, go to “Setting up the transceiver.” (p. 12-11)
 When using a Windows device, go to “Setting up the RS-MS3W.” (p. 12-13)
 When using an Android device, go to “Setting up the RS-MS3A.” (p. 12-14)

12-8
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up a network

DDWhen connecting your device to the Internet using a cellular system

A Global IP address is required to use the DV
Gateway function. USB cable
INTERNET

* 1* 2

USB cable

*2

*1 You can use a cellular system compatible computer.

*2 Needs a Global IP address.

A Global IP address
A static or dynamic IPv4 Global IP address assigned to your Windows or Android device is needed.
Ask your cellular system company to provide a Global IP address to your device.

NOTE:
•• Turn OFF your Wi-Fi setting when you operate using a cellular system.
•• Communication errors may occur when using a cellular system.
•• Depending on your contract, you may be charged a large or additional communication fee. Ask your cellular service provider
about the content of your contract.

 When using a Windows device, go to “Setting up the RS-MS3W.” (p. 12-13)

 When using an Android device, go to “Setting up the RS-MS3A.” (p. 12-14)

12-9
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up a network

DDWhen connecting your device to the Internet using a mobile router

The following items are needed to use the DV USB
Gateway function. cable INTERNET
•• An Internet connection with an IPv4 Global IP address
•• A static*1 local IP address set to your Windows or Android *1 *2
device
•• Port forwarding of port 40000

*2
USB cable
*1 A static IP address to the Windows or Android device is *1
recommended.
*2 Needs a Global IP address and forwarding port number
40000.

1. A Global IP address
A static or dynamic IPv4 Global IP address assigned to the router is needed.
LLYour router may not have a Global IP address, depending on your Internet service provider.
Ask your Internet service provider about the Global IP address setting.

2. Setting a static local IP address

When using a mobile router, you need to set a static local IP address to the Windows or Android device.
LLUsable IP addresses differ, depending on your router. Ask the router’s manufacturer for details.
LLDO NOT set the same IP address to two or more devices that are connected to the same router.
LLAsk your Windows or Android device’s manufacturer about the setting details.

3. Port forwarding
When using a mobile router, enable communication with the Internet, as described below.
•• Forward the port number 40000 to the Windows or Android device.
•• “UDP” should be used as the port protocol.
•• Set a static local IP address in Procedure 2 (2. Setting a static local IP address) as a destination port.
LLAsk the router’s manufacturer about how to forward the port.
LLOnly one Windows or Android device connected to the router can use the DV Gateway function at the same time.
LLDepending on the router settings, you must configure the IP filter settings. Check the router’s manual on how to configure the
settings.

 When using a Windows device, go to “Setting up the RS-MS3W.” (p. 12-13)

 When using an Android device, go to “Setting up the RS-MS3A.” (p. 12-14)

12-10
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up the device

DDWhen using the Internal Gateway function
Connecting to a router Gateway Repeater (Server IP/Domain)
Connect the transceiver to the router using the LAN Enter the gateway repeater’s address or domain name.
cable. LLThe address consists of up to 64 characters.
NOTE: You must have your call sign registered to a
gateway server that has the RS-RP3C installed. Ask
the gateway repeater administrator for details.

LAN cable IC-905

Terminal/AP Call sign
Router To the [LAN] port
Enter the Terminal/AP call sign that is registered
as the access point on the RS-RP3C’s Personal
Information screen.
LLThe call sign should be 8 characters long.
Setting the Internal Gateway Settings •• Enter spaces before the 8th character if necessary.
1. Open the INTERNAL GATEWAY SETTINGS •• Enter a desired ID suffix between A to Z, except for G,
screen. I, and S, for the 8th character.
» 2 > DV GW > Internal Gateway Settings
Gateway Type (Default: Global)
2. Touch to select the item to set.
(Example: “Terminal/AP Call sign”) Selects the gateway type.
LLSelect “Global” when operating outside of Japan.

UDP Hole Punch (Default: OFF)

Selects whether or not to use the UDP Hole Punch
function. This function enables you to communicate
with other station who uses the Terminal or Access
Point mode even if you do not forward port 40000 of a
router. (p. 12-6)
3. Enter a call sign, and then touch [ENT].
LLSee right for details on the setting items and their
options. LLInformation
•• You cannot communicate using this function when
the destination station uses the software that is not
compatible with the UDP Hole Punch function.
•• When forwarding port 40000 of a router, select “OFF.”

4. To close the INTERNAL GATEWAY SETTINGS

screen, push several times.

12-11
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up the device

DD When using the Internal Gateway function

Allowed Call Sign (Access Point Mode)
 (Default: Disable)
Selects to use the call sign restriction for the Access
Point mode. When “Enabled” is selected, this allows
only stations with registered call signs to transmit
through the Internet.
•• Disable: Allows all call signs to transmit.
•• Enable: Allows only the call sign entered on the
“Allowed Call sign List” to transmit.
LLWhen using the Terminal mode, select “Disabled.”

Allowed Call Sign List

Enter the call sign of the stations that you allow
to transmit through the Internet while “Enabled” is
selected for “Allowed Call sign (Access Point Mode).”
LLYou can add up to 30 call signs.

Adding a call sign Deleting a call sign

1. Touch for 1 second. 1. Touch the Call sign for 1 second.

2. Touch “Add.” 2. Touch “Delete.”

3. Enter the Call sign, and then touch [ENT]. 3. Touch [YES].

12-12
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up the device

DDWhen using the RS-MS3W software

The RS-MS3W is a Windows application to use with COM port settings
the External Gateway function. Set the COM port.
You can download it from the Icom website. 1. After connecting, turn ON the transceiver.
2. Click “Com Port (P)” in the “Settings (S).”
System requirements •• The Com Port Setting window is displayed.
The following are required to use the RS-MS3W. 3. Select the COM port number that the USB cable
 (As of March 2023) is connected to.
•• Operating System (OS) LLClick “▼” to display the COM ports on a drop-down
Microsoft® Windows® 11 (64bit) list.
Microsoft® Windows® 10 (32/64bit) LLSee the USB cable’s Installation Guide that you
LLExcept for Windows on ARM can download on the Icom website, for details on
checking the COM port number.
4. Click <OK>.
•• USB port
USB 1.1 or 2.0 port
Setting the RS-MS3W
Set the RS-MS3W to start using the DV Gateway
•• Cable
function.
USB cable, depending on your device’s USB port.

TIP: Download the USB driver and the installation

guide from the Icom website.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/

Installing the RS-MS3W

Download the latest RS-MS3W and its instruction
manual from the Icom website.
Read the RS-MS3W instruction manual on how to
install the software.
LLSearch by “RS-MS3W.” LLThe screen may be different, depending on the
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/ application version.

Connecting a USB cable Read the RS-MS3W instruction manual about each
Connect the transceiver to the Windows device using setting item.
a USB cable.

NOTE: About the Firewall setting

PC
When you use a firewall security software, a
communication error may occur by the firewall
USB cable
blocking the necessary ports or data.
Before using the DV Gateway function, confirm that
To a USB port the RS-MS3W’s communication is not blocked.
To the [USB] port IC-905 LLAsk your firewall security software’s manufacturer about
the setting details.
NOTE: Turn OFF the transceiver before connecting
or disconnecting the cable.

12-13
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Setting up the device

DDWhen using the RS-MS3A

The RS-MS3A is an application for Android device to Connecting a USB cable
use the External Gateway function. Connect the transceiver to the Android device using a
Download the application from Google Play. USB cable.
LLUse version 1.31 or later of the RS-MS3A application
software Android device
with the USB
System requirements host function
USB cable
The following are required to use the RS-MS3A.
 (As of March 2023)
•• Android device To a USB port
IC-905
Android 5.0 or later with the USB host function To the [USB] port
LLThe RS-MS3A has been tested with Android 5.x.x,
6.x.x, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.0, and 12.0. NOTE:
TIP: The USB host function is needed to use a USB •• Turn OFF the transceiver before connecting or
device with an Android device. To check whether or disconnecting the cable.
not your Android device has the USB host system, •• When an Android device is connected, the USB
connection indicator ( ) is displayed on the
check the device’s instruction manual.
transceiver. If the indicator is not displayed, enable your
Android device to detect the USB device.
•• Remove the USB cable when you do not use the cable.
•• Cable Otherwise, the battery will be quickly exhausted.
USB cable, depending on your device’s USB port. •• If the application selection window is displayed, select
“RS-MS3A” to start the application.
NOTE: Some functions may not be usable,
depending on:
•• applications installed in the Android device Setting the RS-MS3A
•• memory capacity Set the RS-MS3A to start using the DV Gateway
function.

For operations or settings of the Android device, read

the Android device’s instruction manual.
LLDisplay indications may differ, depending on the OS
version or settings.

Installing the RS-MS3A

1. Start the Android device.
2. Touch “Play Store.”
3. Enter “RS-MS3A.” LLThe screen may be different, depending on the
LLDO NOT abbreviate the application name to search. application version.
4. Touch “ (search).”
5. Touch “RS-MS3A.” Read the RS-MS3A instruction manual about each
•• The RS-MS3A application information is displayed. setting item.
LLIf your Android device is not compatible with the LLSearch by “RS-MS3A.”
RS-MS3A, the application is not displayed. https://www.icomjapan.com/support/
6. Touch “Install.”
7. Touch “Agree to download.”
•• Starts installing the application. NOTE: When the Android device does not work
•• After the installation is completed, the icon is properly, try putting the Access Point transceiver at a
displayed on your home screen. place father away from the Android device.

12-14
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Terminal mode operation

DDSetting the Terminal mode
1. Open the DV GATEWAY screen. TIP: Canceling the Terminal mode
» 2 > DV GW Touch “<<Normal Mode>>” in the QUICK MENU
2. Touch “<<Terminal Mode>>.” screen or the DV GATEWAY screen.
» 2 > DV GW > <<Normal Mode>>
LLTo display the QUICK MENU screen, push .
LLWhen using the External Gateway function, click (touch)
<Stop> in the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A before the
transceiver returns to the normal mode.

About the Internal Gateway icon

When using the Internal Gateway function, displays
Internal Gateway icon the communication status.
Icon Status
In the standby mode

While transmitting

While receiving
“Ext” is displayed when using the
Transmission error (The repeater is busy.)
External Gateway function.
Transmission error

When using the External Gateway function Network error

After the transceiver is in the Terminal mode, click
Receiving while transmitting
(touch) <Start> in the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A.
LLIf an error message is displayed, see page 12-27 for tips Receive error
on how to solve the problem.
LLIf an error icon is displayed, see page 12-22 for tips on
how to solve the problem.
NOTE: In the Terminal mode
•• The Power Save function and the Time Out Timer
function are not activated.
•• The following items are automatically set.
Operating mode: DV mode*
DR function: ON*
FROM: MY Call Sign
AFC function: OFF
RIT function: OFF
P.AMP function: OFF
ATT function: OFF
TX PWR LIMIT function: OFF
* These settings do not return to the previous settings,
even if you cancel the Terminal mode.
•• The Terminal mode is not automatically canceled, even
if you turn OFF the transceiver, then turn it ON again.

12-15
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Terminal mode operation

DDOperating in the Terminal mode

NOTE: In the Terminal mode, you can make a
Gateway CQ call, or a call to a specific station, using
call sign routing.
LLYou cannot make a call if you select “Local CQ” or
“Reflector.”

Example: Making a Gateway CQ call Example: Making a call to a specific station

1. Touch “TO.” 1. Touch “TO.”

2. Touch “Gateway CQ.” 2. Touch “Your Call Sign.”

3. Select the repeater group where your destination 3. Select your destination station. (Example: Rick)
repeater is listed. (Example: 12: Japan)

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected name is

4. Select your destination repeater. (Example: Hirano) set in “TO.”
4. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.
•• While transmitting, the TX indicator lights orange.
LLWhile receiving a signal through the Internet, you
cannot transmit.

•• Returns to the DR screen, and selected repeater
name is set in “TO.”
5. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.
•• While transmitting, the TX indicator lights orange.
LLWhile receiving a signal through the Internet, you 5. Release [PTT] to receive.
cannot transmit. LLIf you do not receive a reply, see page 12-23 for tips
on how to solve the problem.

6. Release [PTT] to receive.

LLIf you do not receive a reply, see page 12-23 for tips
on how to solve the problem.

12-16
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Access Point mode operation

DDSetting the Access Point mode
In this section, set an Access Point transceiver. TIP: Canceling the Access Point mode
Touch “<<Normal Mode>>” in the QUICK MENU
1. Open the DV GATEWAY screen. screen or the DV GATEWAY screen.
» 2 > DV GW » 2 > DV GW > <<Normal Mode>>
2. Touch “<<Access Point Mode>>.” LLTo display the QUICK MENU screen, push .
3. Rotate to set the operating frequency. LLWhen using the External Gateway function, click (touch)
LLThe frequency is used to communicate with the <Stop> in the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A before the
Remote D-STAR transceiver. transceiver returns to the normal mode.
LLIn the Access Point mode, you can change the
operating frequency. About the Internal Gateway icon
When using the Internal Gateway function, displays
the communication status.
Icon Status
In the standby mode

While transmitting

While receiving
Internal Gateway icon
Transmission error (The repeater is busy.)

Transmission error

Network error

Receiving while transmitting

“Ext” is displayed when using the Receive error

External Gateway function.
LLIf an error icon is displayed, see page 12-22 for tips on
how to solve the problem.
NOTE: BE SURE to check your local regulations or
laws to select the appropriate operating frequency.

When using the External Gateway function

After the transceiver is in the Access Point mode, click
(touch) <Start> in the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A.
LLIf an error message is displayed, see page 12-27 for tips
on how to solve the problem.

NOTE: In the Access Point mode

•• The Power Save function is not activated.
•• The following items are automatically set.
Mode: VFO mode*
Operating mode: DV mode*
Duplex mode: OFF*
AFC function: OFF
RIT function: OFF
VOX function: OFF
MONITOR function: OFF
* These settings do not return to the previous settings,
even if you cancel the Access Point mode.
•• The Access Point mode is not automatically canceled,
even if you turn OFF the transceiver, then turn it ON
again.

12-17
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Access Point mode operation

DDMaking a Gateway call through the Access Point transceiver

In this section, set up a Remote D-STAR transceiver you are going to operate.
LLRead the Remote D-STAR transceiver’s instruction manual for setting details.

NOTE: While in the Access Point mode, you can When using the DR function
make a Gateway CQ call or a call to an individual NOTE: If you have imported the Repeater List, you
station using call sign routing. have to register the Access Point information again
LLYou can select the “Local CQ,” but cannot make a call. because the Repeater List is overwritten.

In this document, the ID-51A (PLUS2)/ID-51E (PLUS2)

Example: W
 hen setting the operating frequency to is used as an example of a Remote D-STAR transceiver.
430.850 MHz, and making a Gateway CQ
call.
Step 1. Register the Access Point information to
Remote D-STAR the Repeater List
transceiver*1 LLRegister the Access Point information in the MENU screen.
(MENU > DV Memory > Repeater List)
Access point
Other
station
1. Select a group you want to add your Access Point
information to.
INTERNET 2. After selecting a group, open the Repeater List
Operating Edit screen. (QUICK MENU > Add)
frequency: Operating frequency:
430.850 MHz 430.850 MHz
UR: /JP1YIU A MY Call Sign: Hamacho 430
MY: JL3YRP JA3YUA (JP1YIU A)
Terminal/AP Call sign*2:
JA3YUA D
3. Set “TYPE” to “DV Repeater.”
LL“DV Repeater” is used for Repeater operation in the
*1  ny model as long as the transceiver is D-STAR capable.
A DV mode.
Only one D-STAR transceiver can use the Access Point at 4. Enter your favorite name into “NAME” and “SUB
the same time. NAME.” (Example: MY AP)
*2 When you use the External Gateway function, enter the
Call sign in “Terminal/AP Call sign” in the RS-MS3W or
RS-MS3A.

5. Set “CALL SIGN” to the Access Point

transceiver’s call sign. (Example: JA3YUA)
LLAfter setting “CALL SIGN,” “GW CALL SIGN” is
automatically set.

12-18
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Access Point mode operation

DD Making a Gateway call through the Access Point transceiver

When using the DR function

Step 1. R
 egister the Access Point information to the Step 2. Set the Access Point using the DR function
Repeater List (Continued) Set the Access Point registered in Procedure 1 (1.
6. Set “USE (FROM)” to “YES.” Register the Access Point information to the Repeater
7. Set “FREQUENCY” to the Access Point List) to “FROM.”
transceiver’s operating frequency.
(Example: 430.850)
8. Set “DUP” to “DUP–.”

Step 3. Set “TO” and transmit

9. Set “OFFSET FREQ” to “0.000.00.” 1. Set “TO” to a destination.
(Example: Hamacho 430)
LLYou can select the “Local CQ,” but cannot make a call.

10. Select “<<Add Write>>” and write the Access

Point information.
2. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.
3. Release [PTT] to receive.
LLIf you do not receive a reply, see page 12-25 for tips
on how to solve the problem.

12-19
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Access Point mode operation

DD Making a Gateway call through the Access Point transceiver

When not using the DR function

In this document, the ID-51A (PLUS2)/ID-51E (PLUS2) is used as an example of a Remote D-STAR transceiver.

Step 1. Enter the VFO mode Step 4. Set the duplex direction
Push [V/MHz]. 1. Push [QUICK].
2. Select “DUP.”

Step 2. Set the operating frequency

Rotate [DIAL] to set the frequency that is set in the 3. Select “DUP–.”
Access Point transceiver. (Example: 430.850)

Step 3. Set the Receive mode to “DV mode”

Push [MODE] several times until “DV” is displayed.
LLWhen the “GPS TX Mode” is set, “DV-G” or “DV-A” is
displayed.

12-20
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Access Point mode operation

DD Making a Gateway call through the Access Point transceiver

When not using the DR function (Continued)

Step 5. Set the frequency offset Step 6. Set “UR” to the destination station call
1. Push [MENU]. sign
2. Select “DUP/TONE....” 1. Hold down [CS] for 1 second to enter the
Operating Call Sign Select mode.
2. Select “UR.”
3. Set the destination repeater or destination
station’s call sign.
LLIn the Access Point mode, you can select the
“CQCQCQ” but cannot make a call.

3. Select “Offset Freq.”

4. Push [MENU].
•• Returns to the standby screen.

4. Set to “0.000.00.”
Step 7. Hold down [PTT] to transmit
1. Hold down [PTT] to transmit.
2. Release [PTT] to receive.
LLIf you do not receive a reply, see page 12-25 for tips
on how to solve the problem.

TIP: When the settings are saved into a memory

5. Push [MENU]. channel, you can quickly select them. Read the
•• Returns to the standby screen. Remote D-STAR transceiver’s instruction manual for
details.

12-21
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Troubleshooting
DDError icons of the transceiver
If an error icon is displayed when using the Internal Gateway function, read the following chart. If you are unable to
locate the cause of a problem or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your Icom Dealer or Service Center.

Icon Possible Cause Solution REF.

Transceiver connection is wrong. Check the connection between the p. 12-13
transceiver and the router.
Gateway Repeater cannot be found. Check the Network settings. p. 12-7
The call sign has not been added Set “Allowed Call Sign” to “Disable” in p. 12-12
to “Allowed Call Sign List” in the the INTERNAL GATEWAY SETTINGS
transceiver, when “Allowed Call Sign” is screen.
set to “Enable.” Add the Remote D-STAR transceiver’s p. 12-12
call sign to “Allowed Call Sign List” in
the INTERNAL GATEWAY SETTINGS
screen.
Your call sign (MY) has not been Register your call sign (MY) at a p. 10-5
registered at a gateway server. gateway server.
The Terminal/AP call sign that is set in Register the Terminal/AP call sign p. 10-5
the transceiver has not been registered that is set in the transceiver in the
in the RS-RP3C as the access point. RS-RP3C as the access point.
Destination station’s call sign (UR) has Check the destination station’s –
not been registered to the gateway register information.
server, or the call sign do not match
your transceiver’s setting.
Destination station that uses the Destination station makes a call. –
Terminal mode or Access Point mode
does not transmit periodically.
The repeater is busy. Wait for a while, and try again. –

A signal is received while transmitting. Destination station makes a call –

again.
The transceiver cannot receive the Destination station makes a call –
signal. again.

12-22
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Troubleshooting

DDTroubleshooting for the Terminal mode operation

The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions.
If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your Icom Dealer
or Service Center.

Problem Possible Cause Solution REF.

After your call, the repeater does Transceiver connection is wrong. When using the Internal Gateway p. 12-11
not return a status reply. function, check the connection
between the transceiver and the
router.
When using the External Gateway pp. 12-13,
function, check the connection 12-14
between the transceiver and the
Windows or the Android device.
“Allowed Call Sign” is set to “Enable.” When using the Internal Gateway p. 12-12
function, set “Allowed Call Sign” to
“Disable” in the INTERNAL GATEWAY
SETTINGS screen.
When using the External Gateway RS-MS3W,
function, set “Allowed Call sign” RS-MS3A’s
to “Disable” in the RS-MS3W or instruction
RS-MS3A. manual
When using the External Gateway Click (touch) <Start> in the
function, you did not click (touch) RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A.
<Start> in the RS-MS3W or
RS-MS3A.
After your call, the repeater The call was successfully sent, but no Wait for a while, and try again. –
replies “UR?,” Your own call sign station immediately replied.
(MY) and ID suffix “G.”
After your call, the repeater Your call sign (MY) has not been Register your call sign (MY) at a –
replies “RX” or “RPT?” and Your registered at a gateway server. gateway server.
own call sign (MY) and ID suffix The Terminal/AP call sign that is When using the Internal Gateway p. 10-5
“G.” set in the transceiver, RS-MS3A, or function, register the Terminal/AP call
RS-MS3W has not been registered in sign that is set in the transceiver in the
the RS-RP3C as the access point. RS-RP3C as the access point.
When using the External Gateway p. 10-5
function, register the Terminal/AP
call sign that is set in the RS-MS3A
or RS-MS3W in the RS-RP3C as the
access point.
The destination station’s call sign (UR) Check the destination station’s –
has not been registered to the gateway register information.
server, or the registered contents do
not match your transceiver’s setting.
The destination station that uses the The destination station makes a call –
Terminal mode or Access Point mode again.
does not transmit periodically.
After your call, the repeater The repeater cannot connect to the Wait for a while, and try again. –
replies ’RPT?’ and the access destination repeater.
repeater’s call sign. The repeater is busy.

12-23
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Troubleshooting

DD Troubleshooting for the Terminal mode operation

Problem Possible Cause Solution REF.
“L” appears on the LCD. While receiving through the Internet, Wait for a while, and try again. –
some packets may be lost due to LLWhen the transceiver receives
network error (poor data throughput corrupted data, and misidentifies it
performance). is as Packet Loss, “L” is displayed.
You can transmit, but cannot You cannot connect to the Internet, or Check the Internet connection and p. 12-5
receive from the destination Global IP address is not assigned. Global IP address assignment.
repeater. The router or mobile router’s port is not Forward the router or mobile router’s p. 12-5
correctly forwarded. correct port to your deice.
The firewall is blocking the necessary Check your firewall settings. p. 12-13
port.

12-24
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Troubleshooting

DDTroubleshooting for the Access Point mode operation

The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions.
If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your Icom Dealer
or Service Center.

Problem Possible Cause Solution REF.

After your call, the repeater does The wrong Access Point mode Set “FROM” to the correct Access –
not return a status reply. transceiver is selected in the Remote Point mode transceiver.
(No S-meter indication) D-STAR transceiver.
The manually entered frequency or Set the correct frequency or duplex –
duplex setting is wrong in the Remote setting.
D-STAR transceiver.
The transmission from the Remote Move to a place where the Remote –
D-STAR transceiver did not reach the D-STAR transceiver can reach the
Access Point mode transceiver. Access Point mode transceiver.
Transceiver connection is wrong. When using the Internal Gateway p. 12-11
function, check the connection
between the transceiver and the
router.
When using the External Gateway pp. 12-13,
function, check the connection 12-14
between the transceiver and the
Windows or Android device.
The Remote D-STAR transceiver’s call When using the Internal Gateway p. 12-12
sign has not been added to “Allowed function, add the Remote D-STAR
Call Sign List” in the transceiver, transceiver’s call sign to “Allowed
RS-MS3W, or RS-MS3A, when Call Sign List” in the INTERNAL
“Allowed Call Sign” is set to “Enable.” GATEWAY SETTINGS screen.
When using the External Gateway RS-MS3W,
function, add the Remote D-STAR RS-MS3A’s
transceiver’s call sign to “Allowed instruction
Call Sign List” in the RS-MS3W or manual
RS-MS3A.
When using the External Gateway Click (touch) <Start> in the
function, you did not click (touch) RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A.
<Start> in the RS-MS3W or
RS-MS3A.
After your call, the repeater The call was successfully sent to Wait for a while, and try again. –
replies “UR?,” the Access Point the Access Point, but no station
call sign and ID suffix “G.” immediately replied.

12-25
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Troubleshooting

DD Troubleshooting for the Access Point mode operation

Problem Possible Cause Solution REF.
After your call, the repeater The Remote D-STAR transceiver’s call Set the Remote transceiver’s call sign p. 10-4
replies “RX” or “RPT?” and the sign has not been set in the transceiver. in the transceiver.
Access Point call sign and ID The Remote D-STAR transceiver’s Register the Remote D-STAR p. 10-5
suffix “G.” call sign has not been registered at a transceiver’s call sign at a gateway
gateway server. server.
The Terminal/AP call sign that is When using the Internal Gateway p. 10-5
set in the transceiver, RS-MS3A, or function, register the Terminal/AP call
RS-MS3W has not been registered in sign that is set in the transceiver into
the RS-RP3C as the access point. the RS-RP3C as the access point.
When using the External Gateway p. 10-5
function, register the Terminal/AP call
sign that is set in the RS-MS3A or
RS-MS3W into the RS-RP3C as the
access point.
The destination station’s call sign (UR) Check the destination station’s –
has not been registered to the gateway register information.
server, or the registered contents do
not match your transceiver’s setting.
A wrong destination repeater’s call sign Set “TO” to the correct destination p. 12-18
is set to “TO.” repeater’s call sign.
The transceiver’s Internal Gateway When using the Internal Gateway p. 12-11
settings or the application software function, correctly set the transceiver’s
settings are wrong. Internal Gateway settings.
When using the External Gateway RS-MS3W,
function, correctly set the RS-MS3W RS-MS3A’s
or the RS-MS3A. instruction
manual
The destination station that uses the The destination station makes a call –
Terminal mode or Access Point mode again.
does not transmit periodically.
After your call, the repeater The repeater cannot connect to the Wait for a while, and try again. –
replies ’RPT?’ and the access destination repeater.
repeater’s call sign. The repeater is busy.
“L” appears on the LCD. While receiving through the Internet, Wait for a while, and try again. –
some packets may be lost due to LLWhen the transceiver receives
network error (poor data throughput corrupted data, and misidentifies it
performance). is as Packet Loss, “L” is displayed.
“DV” and “FM” icons alternately While in the DV mode, an FM signal is Use a different operating frequency –
blink. received. until there are no FM signals on the
original frequency.
You can transmit, but cannot You cannot connect to the Internet, or Check the Internet connection and p. 12-5
receive from the destination Global IP address is not assigned. Global IP address assignment.
repeater. The router or mobile router’s port is not Forward the router or mobile router’s p. 12-5
correctly forwarded. correct port to your device.
The firewall is blocking the necessary Check your firewall settings. p. 12-13
port.

12-26
12 ABOUT THE DV GATEWAY FUNCTION

Troubleshooting

DDError messages of the RS-MS3W and the RS-MS3A

If an error message is displayed when clicking (touching) <Start> in the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A, read the
following chart. If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or solve it through the use of this chart, contact
your Icom Dealer or Service Center.
Message Possible Cause Solution REF.
Gateway Repeater (Server IP/ The gateway repeater address is not Correctly enter the gateway repeater RS-MS3W,
Domain) cannot be found. correctly entered. address. RS-MS3A’s
instruction
manual
Your Windows or Android device does Connect your Windows or Android –
not connect to the Internet. device to the Internet, and check
whether or not you can access to a
web site on the www browser.
Terminal/AP Call sign is incorrect. The Terminal/AP call sign is not Correctly enter the call sign. RS-MS3W,
correctly entered. LLThe call sign consists of 8 characters. RS-MS3A’s
•• Enter a space before the instruction
character. manual
•• Enter a desired ID suffix
between A to Z, except for G, I,
and S, for the 8th character.
The USB cable is not connected. Transceiver connection is wrong. Check the connection between the pp. 12-13,
(1MM) transceiver and the Windows device, 12-14
or the transceiver and the Android
device.
The USB cable is not connected. The transceiver is not turned ON. Turn ON the transceiver. –
(2MM) The transceiver is in the Normal mode. Enter the Terminal mode or Access pp. 12-15,
Point mode. 12-17
Failed to connect to the network. The application cannot create a socket Check whether or not the port number –
for sending and receiving data. (40000/40002) competes with other
application. If so, stop the competing
application.
Restart the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A. If –
an error message does not disappear,
restart Windows or Android device.
A Network error occurred. System error occurs when receiving Restart the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A. If –
data from a network. an error message does not disappear,
restart Windows or Android device.
Failed to start the service. The gateway repeater address or Correctly enter the gateway repeater RS-MS3W,
Terminal/AP call sign is not correctly address or Terminal/AP call sign. RS-MS3A’s
entered. instruction
manual
System error occurs when the service Restart the RS-MS3W or RS-MS3A. If –
started. an error message does not disappear,
restart Windows or Android device.

12-27
Section 13 DD MODE OPERATION
About the DD mode������������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-2
Setting your PC������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-2
Setting the transceiver��������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-3
DD Connecting a LAN cable����������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-3
DD Setting your call sign���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-3
DD mode operation without a repeater������������������������������������������������������13-4
DD mode operation using a repeater���������������������������������������������������������13-5
Internet access�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������13-6
Troubleshooting for DD mode operation����������������������������������������������������13-7

13-1
13 DD MODE OPERATION

About the DD mode Setting your PC

1200 MHz and higher bands To operate in the DD mode, you need a network
•• Data communication at 128 kbps environment Local Area Network (LAN).
LLCommunication in the DD mode is peer-to-peer.
Data
LLDepending on your operating purposes, you may need
to change a firewall setting, such as to allow pings, file
sharing, or the FTP service. Ask your PC’s manufacturer
about the setting details.
LLAfter finishing DD mode operation, restore the firewall
PC PC setting for security, when you use your PC to access the
Internet.
•• Data can be sent through an Internet connection to
another station or through another repeater
Step 1. Obtaining the static IP address
Management
Server Set a static IP address to your PC.
Data
LLNote the current IP address before you change it.

Communication without a repeater

INTERNET
LLDO NOT set the same IP address between PCs.
Repeater Repeater LLTo prevent the transceiver from unnecessarily
PC PC transmitting, we recommend connecting your PC and
transceiver by using a wired LAN Adapter that is separate
from the Internet connection.
Management
Browsing web sites Server

Example:
LAN1 LAN1
INTERNET
LAN2 LAN2
Repeater
PC PC
PC
IP address: IP address:
While in the DD mode and “TX INHIBIT” 192�168�0�100 192�168�0�101
(Transmission inhibit) is set to “OFF,” data is Subnet mask: Subnet mask:
255�255�255�0
automatically transmitted when it is input from a PC. 255�255�255�0
The received data is output to the PC.
LLYou can change the data output setting.
» SET > DV/DD Set > DD Packet Output Communication using a repeater
Set the IP address, subnet mask, and the repeater’s
PRECAUTION: gateway address that is specified by the repeater
•• While “TX INHIBIT” is OFF, files in the shared folder administrator.
may be modified or deleted, or unknown file(s) may be
copied into the folder by another station. Example:
•• Icom assumes no responsibility whatever for any Server
damages or lost profits resulting from opportunities for
signal communications being lost because of the failure, INTERNET
malfunction, poor condition, damage, or data loss of
this unit or because of such external causes as power Repeater Repeater
PC PC
failure. IP address: Gateway IP address:
Icom also dismisses all responsibility for demands made ***�***�***�*** 10�0�0�9
by a third party. Subnet mask:
•• Since the transmitted data is not encrypted, it can be 255�0�0�0
received and detected by other stations. Default gateway:
•• Connect the IC-905 and PC using an Ethernet cable 10�0�0�9
for Data mode operation before starting DD mode
operation. (p. 13-3)
•• Disconnecting the PC from any other network, ISP, LAN,
and so on, is recommended. A network error may occur.
•• For data transferring (PC-to-PC communication), a
static IP address must be set, and a folder is shared in
the same workgroup between both PCs.
•• You cannot use the NTP Server function and DV Gate
way function while operating in the DD mode.

13-2
13 DD MODE OPERATION

Setting your PC Setting the transceiver

Step 2. Setting the computer information DDConnecting a LAN cable
Enter the computer name, workgroup name and Connect the PC to the [LAN] port on the controller
computer description. using a LAN cable (User supplied).
LLEnter the same workgroup in both PCs. LLThe IC-905’s network setting is not required.
LLYou may not need to enter them, depending on your PC
environment.

Step 3. Setting the shared folder

IC-905
LLAsk your PC’s manufacturer about the setting details.
PC
To the [LAN] port
LAN cable
(User supplied)

DDSelecting your call sign

Select your call sign for DD mode operation.
You can select a different call sign for DD mode
operation from the one you use for DV mode
operation.
LLYou do not have to change the call sign setting if you use
the same one you use for DV mode operation.

1. Open the MY CALL SIGN (DD) screen.

» SET > My Station > My Call Sign (DD)

2. Touch the call sign that you use for DD mode

operation. (Example: JA3YUA /DD)

3. To close the MY STATION screen, push

several times.

13-3
13 DD MODE OPERATION

DD mode operation without a repeater

Step 1. Setting the frequency and mode Step 4. Canceling transmission inhibit and send
1. Set the operating frequency in the VFO mode. the data
2. Select the DD mode. 1. Push to open the Multi-function menu.
2. Touch [TX INHIBIT] to turn OFF the transmission
inhibit setting.
3. Confirm that you can find the other station’s
shared folder on your PC.
4. Open the shared folder.
5. Drag and drop, or copy and paste the desired file
into your folder.

Step 5. After finishing DD mode operation

Step 2. Setting the DD Repeater Simplex mode to OFF 1. Push to open the Multi-function menu.
1. Push . 2. Touch [TX INHIBIT] to turn ON the transmission
2. Touch 2 at the bottom of the screen. inhibit setting.
3. Confirm that the Repeater Simplex mode is set to
“OFF.”
About the Communication Status icon
When operating in the DD mode, displays the
communication status.
Confirm
Icon Status
In the standby mode
While outputting received data to the PC
LLThe IC-905 receives data, and outputs it to
the PC. The RX indicator lights green.
•• Touching [RPS] turns the Repeater Simplex mode
While inputting data from the PC
ON or OFF.
LLThe IC-905 transmits data that is input
4. To close the FUNCTION screen, push . from the PC. The TX indicator lights red.

Step 3. Entering the call sign

1. Open the CALL SIGN screen.
» 2 > CS

2. Touch “UR.”

LLTo directly enter the call sign, touch “UR” for 1 second.
3. Touch “Your Call Sign.”

4. Touch your destination station.

5. To close the CALL SIGN screen, push .
13-4
13 DD MODE OPERATION

DD mode operation using a repeater

Step 1. Setting “FROM” (Access repeater) Step 3. Canceling transmission inhibit and send
1. Hold down for 1 second to display the DR the data
screen. 1. Push to open the Multi-function menu.
2. Touch “FROM” to select, and then touch “FROM” 2. Touch [TX INHIBIT] to turn OFF the transmission
again. inhibit setting.
3. Confirm that you can find the other station’s
shared folder on your PC.
4. Open the shared folder.
5. Drag and drop, or copy and paste the desired file
into your folder.
3. Touch “Repeater List.”
Step 4. After finishing DD mode operation
1. Push to open the Multi-function menu.
2. Touch [TX INHIBIT] to turn ON the transmission
inhibit setting.

About the Communication Status icon

When operating in the DD mode, displays the
•• Displays the REPEATER GROUP screen. communication status.
4. Touch the repeater group where your desired Icon Status
access repeater is listed.
5. Touch your desired DD mode access repeater. In the standby mode
(Example: Kirkland) While outputting received data to the PC
LLThe IC-905 receives data, and outputs it to
the PC. The RX indicator lights green.
While inputting data from the PC
LLThe IC-905 transmits data that is input
from the PC. The TX indicator lights red.

TIP: To begin DD mode communication through

a repeater without using the DR function, do the
•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater following procedures.
name is displayed in “FROM.”
1. Set the access repeater’s frequency.
2. Turn ON the Repeater Simplex mode. (p. 13-4)
Step 2. Setting “TO” (Destination) 3. Set the call signs (UR/R1/R2). (p. 11-36)
1. Touch “TO” twice.

2. Touch “Your Call Sign.”

3. Touch your destination station.

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected name is
displayed in “TO.”

13-5
13 DD MODE OPERATION

Internet access
Step 1. Setting “FROM” (Access repeater) Step 3. Canceling transmission inhibit and access
1. Hold down for 1 second to display the DR the Internet
screen. 1. Push to open the Multi-function menu.
2. Touch “FROM” to select, and then touch “FROM” 2. Touch [TX INHIBIT] to turn OFF the transmission
again. inhibit setting.
3. Open a WEB browser on your PC, and then
access websites.

Step 4. After finishing DD mode operation

3. Touch “Repeater List.” 1. Push to open the Multi-function menu.
2. Touch [TX INHIBIT] to turn ON the transmission
inhibit setting.

About the Communication Status icon

When operating in the DD mode, displays the
communication status.
Icon Status

•• Displays the REPEATER GROUP screen. In the standby mode

4. Touch the repeater group where your desired While outputting received data to the PC
access repeater is listed. LLThe IC-905 receives data, and outputs it to
5. Touch your desired DD mode access repeater. the PC. The RX indicator lights green.
(Example: Kirkland) While inputting data from the PC
LLThe IC-905 transmits data that is input
from the PC. The TX indicator lights red.

•• Returns to the DR screen, and the selected repeater

name is displayed in “FROM.”

Step 2. Setting “TO” (Destination)

1. Touch “TO” twice.

2. Touch “Internet.”

13-6
13 DD MODE OPERATION

Troubleshooting for DD mode operation

The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions.
LLSee also the Troubleshooting section in the Basic manual.

Problem Possible Cause Solution REF.

You cannot transmit or receive. A LAN cable is not connected or is Check the LAN cable connection. p. 13-3
defective. Replace the LAN cable.
“TX INHIBIT” is “ON.” Turn OFF “TX INHIBIT” on the Multi- –
( is displayed.) function menu.
You cannot share files. Your PC settings are incorrect. Check workgroup and folder sharing p. 13-2
settings.
Check the firewall setting.
You cannot connect to the The IP address is incorrect. Set the correct IP address. p. 13-2
Internet.

13-7
Section 14 MAINTENANCE (ADVANCED)
Cloning�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������14-2
Touch Screen Calibration function��������������������������������������������������������������14-4

14-1
14 MAINTENANCE (ADVANCED)

Cloning
The IC-905 has a data cloning capability. This function Step 2. Remove the SD card from the master
is useful when you want to copy all of the settings and transceiver, then insert it into the sub
entered contents from one IC-905 to another. This transceiver.
section describes the cloning method using an SD 1. Turn OFF the master transceiver.
card. 2. Remove the SD card from the master transceiver.
LLRecorded voice memories are not included in the cloning 3. Insert the card into the sub transceiver, then turn
data. To play back the master transceiver’s voice memory,
ON the sub transceiver.
insert the SD card into a sub transceiver, or make a copy
onto the sub transceiver’s SD card using a PC.
LLAssumes that the SD card has already been inserted into
the transceiver.

Step 1. S
 aving the master transceiver’s setting Master Sub
data onto the SD card.
1. Open the SAVE SETTING screen.
NOTE:
» SET > SD Card > Save Setting
•• Turn OFF the transceiver before you insert or remove
2. Touch “<<New File>>.” the SD card.
•• DO NOT turn OFF the transceiver while saving or
loading the setting data. Otherwise, the data may be
corrupted or deleted.

TIP: The setting data is saved in the “icf” file format

that is used in the CS-905 programming software.
When the saved data on a card is copied to a PC,
you can edit it with the programming software.
For details, refer to the CS-905 instructions that can
LLThe file name is automatically set in the following be downloaded from the Icom website.
format: Setyyyymmdd_xx (yyyy: Year, mm: month,
dd: day, xx: serial number). (Continue the steps on the next page.)
3. To save the file with the displayed name, touch
[ENT].

LLIf you want to change the name, delete the name and
reenter it, and then touch [ENT].
4. Touch [YES].

•• Saves the data settings.

5. To close the SD CARD screen, push several
times.

14-2
14 MAINTENANCE (ADVANCED)

Cloning

Step 3. L
 oading the setting data into the sub
transceiver.
1. Open the LOAD SETTING screen. 5. Touch “<<Load>>.”
» SET > SD Card > Load Setting

2. Touch the file to load.

6. Touch [YES] or [NO].

3. Touch “Select.”

LLWhen you touch [YES], the skip settings of the

repeater list are retained.
LLWhen you touch [NO], the skip settings of the
L you want to load all the contents on the LOAD OPTION
LIf
screen, touch “ALL” and go to step 6.
repeater list are cleared.
L you want to load only the repeater list, touch “Repeater List
LIf 7. Touch [YES].
Only” and go to step 6.
4. Touch the loading options.
(Example: CI-V Address)

LLAfter the loading ends, “COMPLETED! Restart the

IC-905.” is displayed.
LLWhen you select “REF Adjust” in step 4, “The new
•• “✓” is displayed on the left side of the selected option. “REF Adjust” setting will be saved” is displayed.
LLThe Set mode settings and Memory channel contents 8. Turn OFF the transceiver, then turn it ON again to
are always loaded. restart the transceiver.

14-3
14 MAINTENANCE (ADVANCED)

Touch Screen Calibration function

When the screen does not respond, or the transceiver TIP: When the touch screen is not accurate, and
does not work correctly after touching the screen, the you cannot access the OTHERS screen.
touched point and the detected point may be different. Do the following steps to display the “Touch Screen
In that case, the Touch Screen Calibration function Calibration” screen.
helps to correct the touch screen sensing accuracy.
1. Turn OFF the transceiver.
1. Open the OTHERS screen. 2. While holding down and , push
» SET > Others to display the “Touch Screen Calibration”
2. Touch “Touch Screen Calibration.” screen.
3. Repeat steps 3 and 4 in the left column.
4. Touch the frequency readout or a key on the
touch screen to confirm that the touch screen is
working correctly.

•• A dot appears on the screen.

3. Touch the dot that is displayed on the screen.

Touch the displayed dot.

•• A new dot appears in another location.

4. Repeat step 3.
•• When the calibration is complete, the transceiver
returns to the OTHERS screen.

14-4
Section 15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
General�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������15-2
DD About updating the firmware���������������������������������������������������������������������������15-2
DD Checking the firmware version������������������������������������������������������������������������15-2
DD Preparation������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������15-3
DD Unzipping the firmware folder��������������������������������������������������������������������������15-3
Updating the firmware��������������������������������������������������������������������������������15-4

15-1
15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

General
DDAbout updating the firmware DDChecking the firmware version
You can update the IC-905’s firmware and the Check the IC-905’s firmware version when you turn
CX-10G’s firmware using an SD card. Updating ON the transceiver.
the firmware adds new functions and/or improves
performance parameters.
You can download the latest firmware from the Icom
website.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/

IMPORTANT: To update the firmware, first format

your SD card using the IC-905. Then copy the
downloaded firmware data from your PC into the
“IC-905” folder on the card.
The firmware version is displayed.

TIP: You can also check the firmware version on the

VERSION screen.
» SET > Others > Information > Version

15-2
15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

General

DDPreparation
Access the following URL and download the firmware file. 6. Select the location where you want to save the
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/ firmware, and then click [Save] in the displayed
LLThese instructions are based on Microsoft® Windows® 10. File Download dialog.

1. Click the “Firmware/Software” link.

Click

2. Enter “IC-905” into the Search box, and then click

[Search].

Click
1Enter
2Click •• The file starts downloading.
•• The firmware data is compressed in a “zip” format
3. Click the desired firmware file link. folder. Unzip it before use.
4. Carefully read “Regarding this Download Service.”
Click “Agree,” and then click [Download].
DDUnzipping the firmware folder
1. Right-click the downloaded firmware folder (zip
format).
•• The right-click menu is displayed.
2. Click “Extract All...”

Click
1Click
2Click •• After unzipping, a folder is created in the same
location as the downloaded folder.
LLIn the “905*” folder, “905*.dat” is created.
5. Click “Save as” in the displayed File Download * Represents the release number.
dialog.
Click

15-3
15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Updating the firmware

CAUTION: NEVER turn OFF the transceiver 5. Touch [▼] to scroll the screen and read all the
while updating the firmware. If you turn OFF the precautions.
transceiver, or if a power failure occurs while 6. After you read and agree with all the precautions,
updating, the transceiver firmware may be damaged, touch [YES].
and you may have to send the transceiver back
to the nearest Icom distributor for repair. This type
of repair is out of warranty, even if the transceiver
warranty period is still valid.

TIP: Be sure to unzip the downloaded file. See the

previous page for details.

1. Copy the downloaded firmware data into the

“IC-905” folder on to an SD card. •• The confirmation dialog is displayed.
When you touch [YES], the backup file is made on
the SD card, and then the Firmware selection screen
is displayed.
7. Touch the Firmware (Example: 905*).
* Represents the release number.

•• The final confirmation screen is displayed.

Copy LLCarefully read all the displayed precautions.
8. After you read and agree with all the precautions,
touch [YES] for 1 second.

2. Insert the SD card into the transceiver.

3. Display the SD CARD screen.
» SET > SD Card

4. Touch “Firmware Update.”

Touch for 1 second

•• The updating starts.
9. When the update is completed, “Firmware updating
has completed.” is displayed in the dialog.
•• The transceiver will automatically restart.
LLAfter the updating finishes, the operating screen is
displayed.

TIP: If “A communication error occurred between

the controller and the RF unit. Please restart the
IC-905.” is displayed, even when restarting the
transceiver, reinstall the firmware update.

15-4
15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

Updating the firmware

Updating the CX-10G’s firmware

CAUTION: NEVER turn OFF either the transceiver,
or NEVER disconnect the cables while updating
the firmware. If you turn OFF the transceiver, or
disconnect the cables, or if a power failure occurs
while updating, the transverter’s firmware may
be damaged, and you may have to send the
transverter’s back to the nearest Icom distributor for
repair. This type of repair is out of warranty, even if
the transverter warranty period is still valid.

1. Access the following URL and download the

firmware file.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/
2. Unzip the downloaded firmware folder.
3. Copy the firmware data into the “IC-905” > “CX-10G”
folder on to an SD card.
4. Insert the SD card into the transceiver.
5. Display the FIRMWARE UPDATE (CX-10G) screen.
» SET > SD Card >
Firmware Update (CX-10G)
6. After you read and agree with all the precautions,
touch [YES].
•• Scroll the screen and read all the precautions.
7. Touch the Firmware.
•• The final confirmation screen is displayed.
LLCarefully read all the displayed precautions.
8. After you read and agree with all the precautions,
touch [YES] for 1 second.
•• The updating starts.
9. When the update is completed, “Firmware
updating has completed.” is displayed in the
dialog.
•• The transceiver will automatically restart.

15-5
Section 16 ADVANCED CONNECTIONS
FSK and AFSK connections�����������������������������������������������������������������������16-2

16-1
16 ADVANCED CONNECTIONS

FSK and AFSK connections

The transceiver has a mode key for RTTY. You can use a PC and an application software to operate RTTY using
a USB cable. See the interface circuit diagram below for details. Refer to the software application’s instruction
manual for setup details.
(Icom does not guarantee the performance of the application software, PC, network device, or network settings.)

When using the USB port

USB cable

To a USB port
PC
To the [USB] port

TIP:
•• To operate RTTY through your PC’s USB port, set the following item.
» SET > Connectors > USB SEND/Keying
•• Download the USB driver and the installation guide from the Icom website.
https://www.icomjapan.com/support/

When using the [MIC-SP] jack, [MIC] jack, and [SEND] jack

Interface circuit example for digital modes (User supplied)

A B 2kΩ : 2kΩ 10kΩ Shield cable

10kΩ
(Trimpot) Connect to
LINE IN or
A MIC IN
3�5 mm (1/8 inch) Shield cable
B Shield cable
Connecting to [MIC-SP] 2kΩ : 2kΩ No connection
C
Shield cable
D 10kΩ 10kΩ
(Trimpot) Connect to
CD E SP OUT
F *1
Shield cable No connection
E C B D-Sub25 D-Sub9
2�5 mm 4�7kΩ *2 RTS
Pin 4 Pin 7 PC
Connecting to [MIC] GND
Pin 7 Pin 5
Connect to
*1 NPN transistor *2 Switching diode COM port
E F
(2SC1815) (1S1588)

3�5 mm (1/8 inch)

Connecting to [SEND]

TIP: We recommend using the SEND terminal on the [SEND] jack to switch between transmit and receive.
If you use the PTT terminal on the [MIC] jack, the data may be cut off.

16-2
How the World Communicates

A7711-8EX
© 2023 Icom Inc. Mar. 2023
1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan